The 1997 Pontiac Firebird Owner’s Manual

1-1 Seats and Restraint Systems This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly. It also explains“SRS” the system. 2-1 Features and Controls This section explains how to start and operate your Pontiac. 3-1 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system. 4-1 Your Driving and the Road Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions. 5-1 Problems on the Road This section tells what to doif you have a problem while driving, such as a flat or tire overheated engine, etc. 6-1 Service and Appearance Care Here the manual tells you how to keep your Pontiac running properly and looking good. 7-1 Maintenance Schedule This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use. 8-1 Customer Assistance Information This section tells you how to contact Pontiac for assistance and how to get service and owner publications. It also gives you informationon “Reporting Safety Defects” on page8-10. 9-1 Index Here’s an alphabetical listingof almost every subject in this manual.You can use it to quickly find something you want to read. We support voluntary I technician certification.

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, WE SUPPORT PONTIAC, the PONTIAC Emblem and the name VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN FIREBIRD are registered trademarks of General CERTIFICATION THROUGH Motors Corporation. National institute for AUTOMOTIVE SERVICE This manual includes the latestinformation at the time it EXCELLENCE was printed. We reserve theright to make changes inthe product after that time without further notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitutethe name “General Motors of Canada Limited” forPontiac For Canadian OwnersWho Prefer a Division whenever it appears in this manual. French Language Manual: Please keep thismanual in your Pontiac, so it willbe Aux propri6taires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous there if you ever need itwhen you’re on the road. If you procurer un exemplaire dece guide en frangais chez sell the vehicle, please leave this manual inso it the new votre concessionaire ou au: owner can use it. DGN Marketing Services Ltd. 1500 Bonhill Rd. Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1C7

Litho in U.S.A. @CopyrightGeneral Motors Corporation 1996 Part No. 10293226 B First Edition All Rights Reserved How to Use this Manual Many people read their owner’s manualfrom beginning I A CAUTION: I to endwhen they first receive theirnew vehicle. If you do this, it will helpyou learn about the features and These mean thereis something thatcould hurt controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find you or other people. that pictures and words work togetherto explain things quickly. In the caution area, we tell youwhat the hazard is. Then Index we tellyou what to do to help avoid or reducethe A good place to look for wh,atyou need is the Index in hazard. Please read these cautions.If you don’t, you or the backof the manual.It’s an alphabetical listof all others couldbe hurt. that’s in the manual,and the page number where you’ll find it. You will also finda circle with a slash throughit in Safety Warnings and Symbols this book. Thissafety symbol means“Don’t,’’ You will find a number of safety cautions inthis book. “Don’t do this,” or “Don’t We use a box and the word CAUTION to tellyou let this happen.” about things that could hurtyou if you were to ignor;e the warning.

iii Vehicle Damage Warnings In thenotice area, wetell YOU aboutsomething that lean damage your vehicle. Many times, this damagewould Also, in this bookyou will findthese notices: not becovered by your warranty, andit could be costly. But the notice will tellyou what t’odo to help avoid the damage. When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION These mean there is something thatcould and NOTICE warningsin different colors or in different words. damage your vehicle. You’ll also see warning labelson your vehicle. They use the same words, CAUTIONor NOTICE.

iv Vehicle Symbols These aresome of the symbols you may find on your vehicle.

For example, These symbols These symbols These symbols These symbols Here are some these symbols are important have to do with are on some of are used on other symbols are used on an for you and your lamps: your controls: warning and you may see: original battery: your passengers indicator lights: whenever your vehicle is CAUTION driven: POSSIBLE A FUSE INJURY COOLANT - TEMP - DOOR LOCK TURN PROTECT UNLOCK SIGNALS EYES BY 6 BATTERY LIGHTER 1 SHIELDING CHARGING SYSTEM PARKING PC CAUSTIC LAMPS WINDSHIELD HORN BATTERY FASTEN DEFROSTER )cT ACID COULD SEAT BRAKE (0) CAUSE BELTS BURNS COOLANT SPEAKER AVOID WINDOW b SPARKS OR DEFOGGER a FLAMES ENGINE OIL w, PRESSURE FUEL p3 FLAME .i) VENTILATING AIR BAG p\ FOG LAMPS FAN ANTI-LOCK (@) EXPLODE $0 BRAKES BATTERY b NOTES

vi v Section 1 Seatsand Restraint Systems

Here you’ll find information about the seatsyour in Pontiac andhow to use your safety beltsproperly. You can also learn about some things youshould not do with air bags and safety belts.

1-2 Seats and Seat Controls 1-27Rear Seat Passengers 1-7 Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone Children1-30 1-12 Here Are QuestionsMany People Ask 1-32Child Restraints About Safety Belts-- and the Answers 1-38 LargerChildren 1-13 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1-41Safety Belt Extender 1-13 Driver Position 1-41Checking Your RestraintSystems 1-20 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 1-41 ReplacingRestraint System Parts After a 1-21 Right Front Passenger Position Crash 1-21 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Seats and Seat Controls This section tellsyou about the seats-- how to adjust them and also about reclining front s’eatbacks, seatback latches and the folding rearseatback. M-rual Front +at

You can lose controlof the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicleis moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you Move the lever under the passenger’s front seatto don’t want to. Adjust the driver’sseat only when unlock it, the vehicle is not moving, Slide the seat to whereyou want it. Then release the lever and try to move the seat with yourbody to make sure theseat is locked into place. Be sure the lever returns to its original position after movingthe seat. 4-Way Manual Seat 6-Way Power Seat (If Equipped)

There are two levers at the frontof the seat. The left The driver’s seat has three controls on the leftside. lever adjusts the seat forwardand back. The right lever A. The front control makes the frontof the seat goUP adjusts the angleof the frontof the seat. and down. To adjust the seats forwardand rearward, lift the lever B. The center controlmakes the whole seat go up and under the left frontof the seat. Slide the seat to where down or forward and backward. you want it. Then release the lever and tryto move the seat withyour body to make sure the seatis locked C. The back control makes the backof the seat go up into place. and down. To raise or lower the entire seat, lift the lever underthe right frontof the seat and lean forward or backward. 1-3 Fully Articulating Sport Seat (If Equipped) The two buttons without dot inflateand deflate the lumbar (lower back areaof the seatback) support.To If your Pontiac hasthese seats, the driver’s seat has the inflate, press the raised button.To deflate, pressthe four-way manual seatadjuster. See “4-Way Manual indented button. Seat” earlierin this part. The passenger seat has thetwo way manual seat adjuster.See “Manual Front Seat” Reclining Front Seatbacks earlier in this part. I

To adjust the seatback, lift the leveron the outer sideof The switch padson the outer sideof the seats “inflate” the seat. Release the lever lockto the seatback where and “deflate” parts of your seatback. you want it. Pull upon the lever and the’seatwill go to The two buttons that have“dots” inflate and deflate the its original upright position. side bolster of the seatback.To inflate, press the raised button. To deflate, press the indented button. 1-4 If you have fully articulating sport seats, yourrecliner lever looks likethis. But don’t havea seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving. I /r\ CAC JON:

Sitting in a reclined position whenyour vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle CAUTION: (Continued)

1-5 Front Seatback Latches r - The front seatbacksfold up, your safety beltscan’t do their job when forward to let peopleget you’re reclined like this. into the back seat,To fold a The shoulder belt can’t do its job. In a crash you seatback forward, lift the could go into it, receiving neck orother injuries. latch locatedon the lower backside of the seatback. The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash the Then the seatback will belt couldgo up over your abdomen. The belt fold forward. forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright. Then sitwell When you return the seatback to its original position, back in the seatand wear your safety belt properly. make ,surethe seatbackis locked. The latch must be down for the seat towork properly, Head Restraints Slide thehead restraint up or downso that the topof the restraint is closest to the top of your ears. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury ina crash. If the seatback isnlt locked, it could move On some models, the head restraintstilt forward and forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could rearward also. cause injury to the person sitting there. Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked.

1-6 Folding Rear Seatback Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone This partof the manual tellsyou how to use safety belts properly. It also tellsyou some thingsyou should notdo with safety belts. And it explains the Supplemental Restraint System(SRS), or air bag system.

Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear a safety belt properly.If you are in a crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt,your injuries can be much worse. You can hit things inside the The rear seatback in your Pontiac folds down to provide vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously more storage space. injured or killed. In the same crash, you might To fold the seatback down: not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your 1. Pull forward on both levers. safety belt,and check that your passengers’ belts are fastened properly too. 2. Fold the seatback down. To raise the seatback: 1. Pull it up to the locked, upright position. 2. Be sure both latches hold the seatbackin place. Have them fixedif they don’t. 1-7 In most states and Canadian provinces, the law saysto I wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.

I You never knowif you’ll be in a crash. If you do havea It is extremelydangerous to ride in a cargo area, crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one. inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, A few crashesare mild, and some crashescan be so people riding in these areas are more likely to be serious that even buckledup a person wouldn’t survive. seriously injured or killed. Do not allow peopleto But most crashes are in between. In manyof them, ride in any area of your vehicle that is not people who buckle up can survive and sometimeswalk equipped with seats and safety belts,Be sure away. Without belts they could havebeen badly hurt everyone in your vehicle is ina seat and using a or killed. safety belt properly. After morethan 25 yt;ars of safety beltsin vehicles, the facts areclear. In most crashes buckling up does matter ... a lot!

I comes on as a reminder to buckle up. (See “Safety Belt Reminder Light”in the Index.)

1-8 Why Safety BeltsWork When you ride in or on mydung, you go as fast as it goes. I

Put someone on it.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on wheels.

1-9 Get it up to speed. Then stop thevehicle. The rider The person keeps goinguntil stopped by something. doesn’t stop. In a real vehicle,it could be the windshield ...

1-10 or the instrument Dane1 ... or the safety belts! With safety belts, you slow down asthe vehicle does. You get more time to stop. You stop over moredistance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why safety belts make such good sense.

1-11 Here Are Questions Many People Ask If I’m a good driver, andI never drive far from About Safety Belts -- and the Answers home, why should I wear safety belts? You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an A: QZ accident -- even one that isn’t your fault -- you and accident ifI’m wearing a safety belt? your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver A: You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safety doesn’t protect you from things beyond your belt or not. But you can unbucklea safety belt, control, such as bad drivers. even if you’re upside down.And your chanceof Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of being conscious during and after an accident, so home. Andthe greatest numberof serious injuries you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph you are belted. (65 km/h). If my vehicle hasair bags, why should I have to Safety belts are for everyone. wear safety belts? A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future. Butthey are supplemental systems only; so they work with safety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bag system ever offered for salehas required the use of safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air bags, you still have to buckle upto get the most protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions, but esp’eciallyin side and other collisions.

1-12 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly Adults This part is onlyfor people of adult size. Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children. And there are different rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding in your Pontiac, see the part of this manual called “Children.” Follow those rules for everyone’s protection. First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has. We’ll start with the driver position. Driver Position This part describes the driver’s restraint system. 3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Lap-Shoulder Belt Don’t let it get twisted. The driver hasa lap-shoulder belt.Here’s how to wear On convertible models, the shoulder beltmay lock if it properly. you pull the belt acrossyou very quickly. If this 1. Close and lock thedoor. happens, let the belt go back slightlyunlock to it. Then pull the belt acrossyou more slowly. 2. Adjust the seat (to seehow, see “Seats” in the Index) so you can sit up straight. 4. Push the latch plate intothe buckle until it clicks.

1-13 If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the 5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulderbelt. the belt. Pull up on the latch plateto make sure it is secure. If the belt isn’t long enough, see“Safety Belt Extender” at the endof this section. Make sure the releasebutton on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 1-14 The lap part of the belt should wornbe low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’dbe less likely to slide under the lap belt.If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause seriousor even fatal injuries. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder and acrossthe chest. These parts of the body are best able totake belt restraining forces. The safety belt locksif there’s a sudden stop or crash. On convertible models, the safety belt also locksif you pull the belt very quickly outof the retractor.

1-15 @ What’s wrong with this?

You can beseriously hurt ifyour shoulder belt is too loose. Ina crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly as much protection this way.

1-16 &.' What's wrong with this?

You can be seriouslyinjured if your belt is buckled in thewrong place like this.In a crash, the belt would goup over your abdomen. The belt forces would bethere, not at the pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

1-17 @ What’s wrong with this?

You can be seriouslyinjured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your body would move toofar forward, which would increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also, the belt would apply too much force to the ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. You could also severelyinjure internal organs like your liver or spleen.

A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.

1-18 Q: What’s wrong with this?

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.In a crash, you wouldn’t have thefull width of the belt to spread impact forces.If a beltis twisted, make it straight so it can work properly, or ask your dealerto fix it.

A: The belt is twisted across the body.

1-19 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone, includingpregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely tobe I seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.

To unlatch the belt, just push thebutton on the buckle. The belt should go back out of the way. Before you close the door, be surethe belt is out of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the belt and your vehicle. A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

1-20 The best way to protect the fetusis to protect the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For 7 pregnant women, as for anyone, thekey to making safety belts effective iswearing them properly. You can be severelyinjured or killed ina crash if you aren’t wearing your safety belt-- even if you Right Front Passenger Position have air bags. Wearing your safety beltduring a The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things way as the driver’s safety belt. See “Driver Position,” inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Air earlier in this section. bags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety belts. All air bags are designed to work with Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS) safety belts, but don’t replace them. Air bags are This part explains the Supplemental Restraint System designed towork only in moderate to severe (SRS) or airbag system. crashes where the front of your vehicle hits Your Pontiac has two airbags -- one airbag for the something. Theyaren’t designed to inflate at driver and another air bag forthe right front passenger. all in rollover, rear, side or low-speed frontal crashes. Everyone in your vehicle should wear a Here are the most important things to know about the safety beltproperly whether or not there’s an air bag system: -- air bag for that person.

1-21 There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel, which shows AIR BAG. Air bags inflate with great force, faster than the AIR blink of an eye. If you’re too closeto an inflating air bag, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts BAG help keep you in position beforeand during a crash. Always wearyour safety belt,even with air

bags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible L J while still maintaining control of the vehicle. The system checks the air bag electricalsystem. for malfunctions. The light tellsyou if there is an electrical problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index for more information.

An inflating air bag can seriously injure small children. Always secure children properly in your vehicle. To read how, see the part of this manual called “Children” and the caution label on the right front passenger’s safety belt.

1-22 How the Air Bag System Works I"

The right front passenger's air bag is thein instrument panel on the passenger's side. Where are the air bags? The driver's air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel.

1-23 it canbe somewhat above or below this range. If your vehicle strikes something that will move ordeform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher. The air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers, side Don’t attach anythingto, or put anything impacts or rear impacts, because inflation would not between, an occupant and an air bag.If help the occupant. something is between an occupant and an air bag, In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an air the bag might not inflate properly orit might bag should have inflatedsimply because of the damage force the object intoyou and cause injury. The to a vehicle or because of what the repaircosts were. path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear,so Inflation is determined by the angleof the impact and don’t attach or put anything on the steering how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or wheel hub or on or near any air bag covering. near-frontal impacts. What makes an airbag inflate? When should an air bag inflate? In an impactof sufficient severity, the airbag sensing An air bag is designed to inflate ina moderate to severe system detects that the vehicle is ain crash. The sensing frontal or near-frontal crash. The air bag will inflate system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed inflates the air bag. Theinflator, air bag and related “threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight into a hardware areall part of the air bag modules insidethe wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the about 9 to 15 mph (14 to 24 krn/h). The threshold level right front passenger. can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that

1-24 How does an air bag restrain? In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions, even belted occupants can contact the steering wheelor the ~ ~~ ~~ ~ ~~ instrument panel. Air bags supplementthe protection When anair bag inflates, thereis dust in the air. provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of This dust could cause breathing problems the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, for people with a history of asthma or other stopping the occupant more gradually.But air bags would not help youin many types of collisions, including breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyonein the rollovers, rear impacts andside impacts, primarily because vehicle should get outas soon as it is safe to dosa an occupant’s motion is not toward thoseair bags. Air If you have breathing problems but can’t get out bags should never be regarded as anythmg more thana of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get supplement to safety belts, and then only in moderate to fresh air by opening a window or door. severe frontal or near-frontal collisions.

What will you see after an air bag inflates? In many crashes severe enoughto inflate an air bag, After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. that some peoplemay not even realize the air bag Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the inflated. Some componentsof the air bag module in the right front passenger air bag. steering wheel hub for thedriver’s air bag, orthe Air bags are designed to inflate only once. Afterthey instrument panel forthe right frontpassenger’s bag, will inflate, you’ll need some new parts for your air bag be hot fora short time. The parts of the bag that come system. If you don’t get them,the air bag system into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to won’t be thereto help protect you in another crash. touch. There will be some smoke and dust coming from A new system will include air bagmodules and vents in the deflated air bags.Air bag inflation doesn’t possibly other parts. The service manual for your prevent the driver from seeing or frombeing able to vehicle covers the need to replace other parts. steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle. 1-25 Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and S ~ ring Your Air Bag-Equipped Pontiac diagnostic module, which records information about the air bag system. The module records information Air bags affect how your Pontiac should be serviced. about the readiness of the system, when the sensorsare There areparts sf the air bag system in several places activated and driver’s safety belt usage at deployment, around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to inflate while someoneis working on your vehicle.Your Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag Pontiac deal’erand the Firebird Service Manual have system. Improper service canmean that your information about servicing your vehicle and the airbag air bag system won’t work properly. See your system. To purchase a service manual, see “Service and dealer for service. Owner Publications” in the Index, I I NOTICE:

If you damage the covering for the driver% orthe For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is right front passenger’s air bag, the bag may not turned of€ and the batteryis disconnected, an air work properly. You may have to replace the air bag can still inflate during improperservice, You bag modulein the steering wheel or both the air can be injured if you are close to an air bag when bag module and the instrument panel for the it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape right front passenger’s air bag. Do not open or or yellow connectors. They are probably part of break the air bag coverings. the air bag system. Be sure to follow proper service procedures, and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so.

rhe air bag system doesnot need regular maintenance.

1-26 Rear Seat Passengers It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up! Accident statisticsshow that unbelted peoplein the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than thosewho are wearing safety belts. Rear passengers who aren’tsafety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle ina crash. And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts. n

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Don’t let it get twisted. Lap-Shoulder Belt On convertible models, the shoulder beltmay lock if The rear seats have lap-shoulder belts. Here’s how to you pull the belt acrossyou very quickly. If this wear one properly. happens, let the beltgo back slightly tounlock it. Then pull the belt acrossyou more slowly. 2. Push the latch plateinto the buckle until it clicks.

1-27 If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the 3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle latch plate and keep gulling until you can buckle it. end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecur’e. If the belt is not long enough, see“Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be ableto unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-28 likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash. On convertible models, the safety belt also locks if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor. I I A CAUTION: You can be seriouslyhurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which could increase injury. The The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on shoulder belt shouldfit against your body. the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less

1-29 Children Everyone ina vehicle needsprotection! That includes infants and all children smaller than adult size. Infact, the law in every statein the United Statesand in every Canadian provincesays children upto some age must be restrained while in a vehicle. Smaller Children and Babies

Smaller children and babies should always be restrained in a child or infant restraint. The instructions for the restraint will say whether it is the right type and size for your child. A To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle. very young child’ship bones are so small that a regular belt might not stay low on the hips, as it should. Instead, the belt will likely beover the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply force right on the child’s abdomen, which could cause serious or fatal injuries. So, be sure that any child small enough €or one is always properly restrained in a child or infant restraint.

1-30 heavy you can’t hold it. For example, ina crash at only 25 mph (40 kmh), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on your arms. The baby would be almost impossible to hold. Secure the baby in an infant restraint.

Never hold a baby in your arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much -- until a crash. During a crash a baby will become so CAUTION: (Continued)

1-31 Child Restraints Be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a labelsaying that it meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may seriously injured if the right front passenger’s find these instructions on the restraintitself or in a air bag inflates. Thisis because the back ofa booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in rearfacing child restraint would be very closeto your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within the inflating air bag. Always secure a rear-facing the restraint to kelp reduce thechancle of personal injury. child restraintin the rearseat. The instructions that come with the infant or child You may, however,secure a forward-facing child restraint will show you how to do that. restraint in the right front seat. Beforeyou secure Where to Put the Restraint a forward-facing child restraint, alwaysmove the front passenger seatas far back as it will go, Or, Accident statistics show that children are safer if they secure the child restraint in the rearseat. are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat, We at General Motors therefore recommend that you put your child restraint in the rear seat. Never put a rear-facing Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child child restraint in the front passenger seat. Here’s why: restraint properly. Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stopand injurepeople in the vehicl’e.Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.

1-32 Top Strap

-- The place wherethe anchor has to go is quite close to your fuel tank. If the anchor isn’t installed correctly, it can make a hole in the fuel tank -- either then, or in a later collision. Gasoline couldleak out and be ignited,and people in the vehicle or outside it could be badly burned. Don’t install the anchoryourself unless you know you can do itcorrectly.

Far cars first sold in Canada, child restraints with a top strap must be anchored according to Canadian law. Your dealer can obtain the hardware kit and install it for you, or you may install it yourself using the instructions provided in the kit. If your child restraint has a topstrap, it should be anchored. If you need to have an anchor installed, you Use the tether hardware kit availablefrom the dealer. can ask your Pontiac dealer toput it in for you. If you The hardware and installation instructions were want to install an anchor yourself, your dealer can tell specifically designed for this vehicle. you how to do it. If you have a convertible, don’t use a restraint that has a top strap in your vehicle because the top strap anchor cannot beinstalled properly. 1-33 Securing a Child Restraint ina Rear Seat Position

You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part about thetop strap if the child restraint has one. 1. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions for the child restraint. 2. Secure the childin the child restraint as the instructions say. 4. Tilt the latch plate to adjust the beltif needed. 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lapand shoulder If the shoulder belt goesin front of the child’s face or portions of the vehicle’s safety belt throughor neck, put it behind the child restraint. around the restraint.The child restraint instructions will show you how.

1-34 5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the releasebutton is 6. To tighten the belt, pullup on the shoulder beltwhile positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe you push down on the child restraint. safety belt quicklyif you ever had to. 7. Push and pull the child restraintin different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle's safety belt and let goit back all theway. The safetybelt will move freely again andbe ready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger.

1-35 Securing a Child Restraint in theRight You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Front Seat Position , . 1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag, always move the seat as far backas it will go before securing a forward-facing child restraint. (See “Se,ats”in the Index.) 2. Put the restraint on the seat, Follow the instructions for the child restraint. U 3. Secure the child in the child restraintas the instructions say. Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. Never 4. Pick up the latch plate, run the lap and shoulder put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why: and portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.

A child in a rearfacing child restraint can be seriously injured if the right front pass’enger’s air bag inflates. Thisis because the back of a rearfacing child restraint would be very closeto the inflating #air bag. Always securea rear-facing child restraintin the rear seat.

1-36 I*

5. Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed. 6. Buckle the belt. Make sure the releasebutton is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or safety belt quickly if you ever had to. neck, put it behind the child restraint.

1-37 Larger Children

7. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt while you push down on the child restraint. Children who have outgrown child restraintsshould 8. Push and pull the child restraint in different wear the vehicle’s safety belts. directions to be sureit is secure. Accident statistics show that children are safer if they To remove the child restraint,just unbuckle the vehicle’s are restrained in the rear seat. But they needto use the safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt safety belts properly. will move freelyagain and be ready to work for an adult Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out in or larger child passenger. a crash. Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other people who are. 1-38 Never do this. Here two children are wearing the same belt. The belt can’t properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured. A belt must be used by only oneperson at a time.

What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt, but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child’s faceor neck? A: Move the child toward the centerof the vehicle, but be surethat the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide.

1-39 A CAUTIQN Never do this. Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is b’ehind the child. If the child wears the belt in this way, in a crash the child might slide under the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap porti’onof the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs, This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

1-40 Safety Belt Extender Replacing Restraint System Parts If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you After a Crash should use it. If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts? But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary. dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. Whenyou go But if the belts were stretched, asthey would be if worn in to order it, take the heaviest coatyou will wear, so the during a more severe crash,then you need new belts. extender will be long enough for you. The extender will be just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that If belts are cutor damaged, replace them. Collision you choose. Don’t let someone else useit, and use it damage alsomay mean you will need to have safety belt only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach it or seat parts repaired or replaced.New parts and repairs to the regular safety belt. may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used at the time of the collision. Checking Yo1 RestraintSystems If an air bag inflates, you’llneed to replace air bag Now and then, make surethe safety belt reminder light system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier in and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and this section. anchorages are working properly. Look for any other loose or damagedsafety belt system parts. If you see anything that might keepa safety belt system from doing its job, have itrepaired. Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip apartunder impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, geta new one right away. Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.) 1-41 1-42 Section 2 Features and Controls

~~ ~ ~

Here you can learn about themany standard and optional featureson your Pontiac, and information on starting, shifting and braking. Also explained arethe instrument panel andthe warning systems that tellyou if everything is working properly -- and what to do if you have a problem.

2-2 Keys 2-40 Shifting Out of PARK (P) 2-4 Door Locks 2-4 1 Parking Over Things ThatBurn 2-6 Remote Keyless Entry System 2-4 1 Engine Exhaust 2- 10 Hatch 2-43 Windows 2-12 Theft 2-43 Horn 2-13 Vehicle and Content Theft-Deterrent System 2-44 Tilt Steering Wheel 2-1 6 PASS-K@ 11 2-44 Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever 2- 17 Feature Customization 2-5 1 Lamps 2-23 New Vehicle “Break-In” 2-54 Interior Lamps 2-23 Ignition Switch 2-56 Mirrors 2-25 Starting Your Engine 2-5 8 Storage Compartments 2-27 Engine Coolant Heater 2-59 Ashtray and Lighter 2-28 Automatic Transmission Operation 2-60 Sun Visors 2-32 Manual Transmission 2-6 1 Floor Mats 2-37 Parking Brake 2-68 Convertible Top 2-3 8 Shifting Into PARK (P) 2-74 Instrument Panel 2-40 Parking Your Vehicle 2-77 Warning Lights, Cages and Indicators

2-1 Keys

Leaving young children in a vehicle with the ignition keyis dangerous for many reasons. A child or otherscould be badly injured or even killed. They could operate power windows or other controls or evenmake the vehicle move. If they turned the ignition to ON and moved the shift lever out of PARK (a),that would release the parking brake. Don't leave the keys ina vehicle with young children.

2-2 The ignition keys are for the The ignition keys don’t have plugs. Instead they have ignition only. bar-coded key tags. These tags may be removed by your dealer or even beforethe vehicle is delivered to your dealer. Each plug has a code onit that tells your dealer or a qualified locksmith how to make extradoor keys. Keep the plugs in a safe place.If you lose yourdoor keys, you’ll be able to have new ones made using these plugs. If you need a new ignition key, contact your Pontiac dealer who can obtain the correct key code. Remember to carry the pre-cut emergency key which Pontiac sends after delivery. In an emergency, call Pontiac Roadside Assistance at 1-800-ROADSIB or 1-800-762-3743. The door keys are for the (In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800). doors and all other locks. NOTICE:

Your Pontiac hasa number of new features that can help prevent theft. But you can havea lot of trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock your keys inside.You may even have to damage your vehicle to get in.So be sure you When a new Firebird is delivered,the dealer removes have extra keys. the plugs from thedoor keys and gives them to the first owner. Door Locks

A CAUTION: \ ‘4 -- Unlocked doors canbe dangerous. I Passengers -- especially children -- can easily open the doors andfall out. Whena door is locked, the inside handle won’t open it. Outsiders can easily enter throughan unlocked door when you slow downor stopyour vehicle. This may not be so obvious: You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle ina crash if the doorsaren’t locked. Wear safety belts From the inside, to lock the door, move the lock control properly, lockyour doors, and you will be far on the door rearward. better off whenever you drive your vehicle. To unlock the door, move the lock control on the door forward. There are several waysto lockand unlock your vehicle. From the outside, use your doorkey, If your vehicle has the Vehicle and Content Theft-Deterrent System and it is armed, unlocking and opening a door this way will set off the alarm. See “Vehicle and ContentTheft-Deterrent System” in the Index.

2-4 Power Door Locks (If Equipped) When the power door lock switch is pressed,a chime will sound three times, indicatingthat Last Door Closed Push the power door lock Locking hasbeen activated. Pressing theLOCK switch switch to lock or unlock again will lock the doors immediately. Pressing the both doors at once. UNLOCK switch will cancela previously requested Last Door Closed Locking. This featureis shipped from the factory inthe off position. To turn this feature on, see “Feature Customization” in the Index. Lockout Prevention(If Equipped) To protect you from locking your keys in the vehicle, this feature stops the power door locks from locking The lock switch works at all times except during wh’enthe keysare in the ignition anda door is open.If “Lockout Prevention”(if that feature is enabled). The the power lock switchis pressed when a door is open, a unlock switch onlyworks when the ignition switchis in chime will sound five times a as reminder to takethe RUN or ACC or when RAP is present, (See “Retained keys out of the ignition before locking thedoor. This Accessorv Power”in the Index.) feature is shipped from the factoryin the on position. If Last Door Closed Locking (If Equipped) you would like to turn this feature off, see “Feature Customization” in the Index. If you have power door locks,you can program a Last Door Closed Locking feature foryour vehicle. This Leaving Your Vehicle feature allows fora delayed lockingof the doors. This If you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, openyour lets you your passengers exit the vehicle after and door and set the locks from theinside. Then get out and you’ve pressed thepower door lock switch.All of the close thedoor. doors will lock once everyone has gotten ofout the vehicle and closed their doors. 2-5 Remote Keyless Entry System Your Remote Keyless Entry System operateson a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry and Science Canada. This devicecomplies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the foll'owing two conditions: (1) this device maynot cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference I received, including interference thatmay cause undesired operation. This devicecomplies with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2)this device must acceptany 3-Button Fob 4-Button Fob interference received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation of the device. If your vehicle bas this opti'on, you can lock; and Changes or modifications to this system by other than an unlock your doors orunlock your hatch up from about authorized service facility could void authorizationto 3 feet (1 m) to about 30 feet (9 m) using the remote use this equipment. keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle.

2-6 Operation AlarmRanic Mode The driver’s door will unlock automatically when If your vehicle is equipped with the Vehicle and Content UNLOCK is pressed. If UNLOCK is pressed again Theft-Deterrent System, you will have a fourth button within five seconds,the passenger door willalso unlock. on your key chain transmitter. This button is the panic All doors will lock when LOCK is pressed. button. If you are involved in a panic situation, press this button and your vehicle’s horn will sound and the The hatch will unlock when the button with the trunk parking lamps willflash. This will draw needed symbol is pressed twice within five seconds, as long as attention to you and your vehicle. To turn this feature the ignition is turned to the OFF position. If the ignition off, either push the panic button again or turn the is on, the trunk symbol button will only work if the ignition to on. Note: This featurewill not work if your transmission is in PARK (P) for an automatic ignition is on or if the key fob is 30 feet (9 m) or more transmission, or if the parking brake is set ona manual away from yourvehicle. transmission. The system will turn on the interior lampsfor about 40 Transmitter Range seconds (or until the ignition switchis turned to the The range of your Remote Keyless Entry systemshould RUN position), when you unlock the doors orhatch. be about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m). At times you The interior lamps will go off when you lock the doors. may notice a decrease in therange. This isnormal for Operating the keychain transmitter may interact with any Remote Keyless Entry system. If the transmitter the Vehicle and Content Theft-Deterrent System(if you does not work, or you have to stand closerto your have this option). See “Vehicle and Content vehicle than normal for the transmitter to work: Theft-Deterrent System” in the Index. 0 You may have to replace the battery in your transmitter. See the instructions for battery replacement. You may be too far from your vehicle. Check your distance, You may have to stand closer to your vehicle in rain or snow. 2-7 0 Check thelocation. Other vehicles or objects Transmitter Verification(I€ Equipped) may be blocking the signal.Take a few steps to This feature provides feedbackto the holder of the remote the right or left. keyless entry transmitter that a commandhas been 0 You may have to synchronize your transmitter received by the keyless entry receiver. The parking larnps to the receiver in your vehicle.See instructions will flash on every lock and unlockcommand and the horn for synchronization. will sound only if theLOCK button is pushed twice within You may have to match the transmitters to your five seconds. This allows for silent operation of locking and unloclung unless a confirming horn chxp is desired. vehicle. See instructions. Other options may be selectedfor this feature (see 0 If none of the above apply, see your dealer or “Feature Custornization” in theIndex). qualified technician for service. Matching Transmitter(s) To Your Vehicle Synchronization Each remotekeyless entry transmitteris coded to Synchronization may be necessary due to the security prevent another transmitter from unlockingyour vehicle. metho’d usedby the Remote Keyless Entry system. The If a transmitter is lost or stolen,a replacement canbe transmitter does not send the same signal twiceto the purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any receiver. The receiver will not respond toa signal it has remaining transmitters with you when you go to your been s’ent previously.This prevents anyone from recoding dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement and playing back the signal fiom the transmitter. To transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters resynchronize the transmitter with the receiver: must also be matched. Once your dealerhas coded the While standing close to your vehicle, simultaneously new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on vehicle. Each vehicle can haveup to four transmitters the transmitter for eight seconds. The doorlocks matched to it. should cycle and parking lamps flashto confirm synchronization. If this doesnot happen, you may need to replace thebattery in your transmitter. Have each transmitter you intend to matchready for the Battery Replacement next steps. To match transmitters to your vehicle: Under normal use, the battery in your key chain 1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position then to transmitter should last about twoyears. the OFF position. This will disarm theVehicle and Content Theft-Deterrent System(if your vehicle has You can tell the battery is weakif the transmitter won’t this option). work at the normal rangein any location. If you have to get close to yourvehicle before thetransmitter works, 2. Remove the RADIO fuse. This fuseis located in the it’s probably time to changethe battery. main fuse block, located on theleft side of your instrument panel. See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” Use onebattery, type CR2032, or a similar type. in the Index. 3. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position three timesquickly (within five seconds). The vehicle will respond by locking the doors, unlocking the driver’s doors and releasing the hatch. Your transmitter is now ready to match your vehicle. 4. Press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the first transmitterfor 15 seconds. The vehicle will respond as in Step3. 5. Repeat Step 4 for the remaining transmitters. 6. When you have finished matching all of your transmitters, replace theRADIO fuse. 7. Check thatall transmitters work by pressing their buttons. If the transmitters don’t work, or if you’d rather not match thetransmitters yourself, see your Pontiac dealer. 2-9 Hatch NOTICE:

When replacing the battery, use care not to touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage It can be dangerous to drive with the hatch open the transmitter. because carbon monoxide (CO)gas can come into your vehicle. You can’t see or smell CO, It can To replace the batteryin the key chain transmitter: cause unconsciousnessand even death. 1. Carefully pry off the cover by inserting a dime (or If you must drive with the hatch open or if similar object) in a slot between the covers and twist, electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and 2. Lift off the back cover. the hatch: 3. Remove and repla’cethe battery. Use one battery, Make sure all windows are shut. type CR2032, or a sirnilar type. Put thenew battery Turn the fan your heating or cooling in printed side down. system to its highest speed with the setting on 4. Replace the back cov’er.Make sure the cover is on VENT, That will force outside air into your tightly s0 water won’t get in. vehicle. See ‘‘Comfort Controls”in the Index. 5. Check the transmitter operation. If the transmitter If you have air outlets on or under the does not work afterbattery replacement, it may need instrument paad, open them all the way. to be resynchronized or matched to your vehicle. See See ‘(Engine Exhaust” in the Index. “Synchronization” in the Index.

2-10 Hatch Release Remote Hatch Release(If Equipped)

Your door key opens the hatch.If your vehicle has the Press the switchunder the Main LampControl to unlock Vehicle and Content Theft-Deterrent System and the the hatch from inside your vehicle.If you have an system is armed,opening the hatch this way will trigger automatic transmission, your shift levermust be in the alarm. First disarm the system oruse the Remote PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) to use theswitch. If you Lock Control transmitter to open the hatch. have amanual transmission and the ignition switch is in RUN, you must set the parkingbrake before you can use the switch. The switch only works when the ignition switch is in RUN or ACC, or when RAP is present. (See “Retained Accessory Power” in the Index.)

2-11 When you park your Pontia’c and openthe driver’s door, NOTICE: you’ll heara chime remindingyou to remove your key from the ignition and takeit with you. Alwaysdo this. If you put thingsin the hatchback area,be sure Your steering wheel willbe locked, and so will your they won’t break the glass whenyou close it. ignition. If you have an automatic transmission, taking your key out also locks your transmission. And Never slam thehatch down. You could break the remember to lock thedoors. glass or damage the defoggergrid (if equipped). Parking at Night On vehicles with the Vehicle and Content Park in a lighted spot, close all windowsand lock your Theft-Deterrent System: The hatch switch will not work vehicle. Remember to keep your valuablesout of sight. while the systemis armed. See “Vehicle and Content Put them in a storag-e area. or take them with vou. Theft-Deterrent System”in the Index. Par ng ,ots Theft If you park in a lot where someone will be watching Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities. your vehicle,it’s best tolock it up and take your keys. Although your Pontiac hasa number of theft-deterrent But what if you have to leave your ignition key? Whatif features, weknow that nothing we puton it can make it you have to leave something valuable inyour vehicle? impossible to steal. However, thereare ways you Put your valuables in a storage area, like your glove can help. box. Key in the Ignition Lock the glovebox. If you leave your vehicle with thekeys inside, it’s an a Lock all the doors except the driver’s. easy target for joy riders or professional thieves-- so don’t do it. Then take the door key and Remote Keyless Entry keychain with you.

2-12 The shock sensor is what triggers the alarmwhen it detects ablow to your vehicle. It is located over the right rear wheelhousenear the sparetire in the hatch If your vehicle has this option, it has a theft-deterrent area. There aretwo levels of alarms via the shock alarm system. Once armed, the system willsound the sensor: Two horn blasts and parking lamp flashes for horn and flash the parking lampsif the vehicle is non-threatening blowsto the vehicle anda full two broken into. minute alarm for harder blows to the vehicle.Its sensitivity can be adjustedif more or lesssensitivity is Shock Sensor desired. (Note:If sensitivity is increased too much, it may give false alarms causedby gusts of wind or other natural events thatmay shake the vehicle). To adjust, remove the label coveringthe adjustment knob on the sensorand adjust as desired.Turn clockwise to increase sensitivity and turn counterclockwise to decrease sensitivity. The shock sensoris ignored by the alarm system when the ignition is on, when the hatch is open, when the alarm is disarmed, whenit is customized to be ignored and for five seconds afterthe horn sounds an alarm or chirp. The shock sensor is ignored after triggering three full alarms until the system is rearmed.

Coupe Convertible

2-13 Arming the System Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Locking If all the doorsare closed, locking the vehiclewith the The alarm system can be transmitter will immediately arm the system. The horn armed to detect break-ins will chirp twice and the parking lamps will flash, by locking your vehicle confirming that the system is armed. If any dooris open using the key chain when the transmitter LOCK button is pressed, the transmitter or by locking the system goes into an armedwait mode, waiting for the doors with the power door doors to close. Once they are closed, the system will lock switch. arm, chirp the horns twice and flash the parking lamps. If the hatch is open or ajar atthe time the system is arming, the horn will only chirp once. Power Door Lock Switch Locking Passive arming is also available, if you would like the If any door is open when the power door lock switch is system to am all by itself after thedoors have been pressed, the system goes into an armed wait mode, closed for a short time. When thesystem is armed, a red waiting for the doorsto close. Once they are closed,the light will flash briefly once every two seconds. (Note: If system will arm and flash the parking lamps.If all of the you return to your vehicle and the red light is flashing doors are closed when the lock switchis pressed, the two brief flashes every two seconds, the system is armed system assumes you are inside thevehicle, so it will not and the shock sensor had triggered a two minute alarm. arm. Note: Locking the doorsby using the manual door If the red light is flashing threetimes every two seconds, locks willnot arm the system. the system is armed and there was anintrusion that sounded the alarm). Horn chirps and parking lamp flashes can be set to your choice.

2-14 Passive Arming Turning Off the Alarm If the ignition was just turned off and a door was If you started the alarm by pressing the panic button on opened, the system will arm six seconds after all doors the key chain transmitter, you must either push that are closed, whether or not you lock them. In all other button again or turn the ignition switch to the RUN cases, the system will wait 30 seconds after all doors are position to stop the alarm. closed before arming, allowing you time to get into the If the alarmis sounding due to the shock sensor or a vehicle and put the key in theignition. The parking door orhatch opening, it can beturned off by either lamps will flash when the system arms. Passive arming turning the ignition switch with a proper key inserted or is not enabled from thefactory. by pressing any button on thekey chain transmitter. If you use your key chain transmitter tosilence the alarm, Disarming the System additional things will happen depending upon which There are two ways to disarm the system: button you press. 1. Press the UNLOCK button on the key chain Pressing the UNLOCK button will turn the alarm transmitter. If the horn chirps two or three times off, unlock the driver’s door and disarm the system. when you unlock the car, the alarm sounded in your 0 Pressing the LOCK button will turn the alarm off, absence. Two chirps means that the shock sensorwas keep the doors locked and keep the system armed. set off and three chirps means that a door or hatch Pressing the trunk symbol button twice within five was opened. seconds will turn the alarmoff, unlock and disarm 2. Turn the ignition tothe RUN position with the the hatch only. proper key. Pressing the panic button will turn the alarm off, For more information on customizing the features keep the doors locked and keep the system armed. mentioned here, see “FeatureCustomization” in If the alarm is sounding becausean incorrect ign“’ >n the Index. key was used, press any button on the key chain transmitter to turn the alarm off. The alarm will stop by itself after two minutes. 2-15 PASS-Key’ I1 When thePASS-Key I1 system senses that someoneis using the wrong key, it shuts down thevehicle’s starter Your vehicle is equipped and fuel systems.For about three minutes,the starter with the PASS-Key 11 won’t work and fuel won’tgo to the engine. If someone (Personalized Automotive tries to start your vehicle againor uses another key Security System) during this time, the vehicle willnot start. This theft-deterrent system. discourages someone from randomly trying different PASS-Key I1 is a passive keys with different resistor pellets in an attempt to make theft-deterrent system. It a match. works when you insert os The ignitionkey must be clean and dry before it’s remove the key from inserted in the ignitio’nor the enginemay not start. If the the ignition. engine does not start and the SECURITY light stays on when you try to start the vehicle, the key may be dirty or PASS-Key I1 uses a resistor pelletin the ignition key wet, Turn the ignition off. that matches a decoder in your vehicle.

2-16 Clean and dry the key. Wait about three minutes and try Feature Customization (If Equipped) again. The SECURITY lightmay remain on during this time. If the starter still won’t work, and the key appears Your Pontiac’s locks and lighting systemscan be to be clean and dry, wait about three minutes and try programmed with several different features. The another ignition key. At this time, you may also want to features you can program depend upon the options that check the fuses (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the came with your vehicle. The following list tells you the Index). If the starter won’t work with the other key, your features that can beprogrammed. Listed next to each vehicle needs service. If your vehicle do’esstart, the first feature is the option you need tohave on your vehicle in ignition key may be faulty. See your Pontiac dealer or a order to be able toprogram that particular feature. locksmith who can service thePASS-Key 11. 0 Exit Lighting (available forall) If you accidentally use a key that has a damaged or 0 Delayed Illumination (available for all) missing resistor pellet, the starter won’t work, and the SECURITY light will flash. But you don’t have to wait 0 Last Door Closed Locking(if equipped with power three minutes before trying another ignition key. door locks) See your Pontiacdealer or a locksmith who can service 0 Lockout Prevention(if equipped with power doorlocks) the PASS-Key I1 to have a new key made. 0 Remote Lock Control Verification (if equipped with If you’re ever driving and SECUFUTY the light comeson and Vehicle and Content Theft-Deterrent System) stays on, you will be able to restart your engine ifturn you it 0 Theft-Deterrent Arming Method(if equipped with off. Your PASS-Key II system, however, is not working Vehicle and Content Theft-Deterrent System) properly and must be serviced by your Pontiac dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by the PASS-KeyII system. 0 Theft-Deterrent Arming Verification (if equipped with Vehicle and Content Theft-Deterrent System) If you lose or damage a PASS-Key I1 ignition key, see your Pontiac dealer or a locksmith who can service 0 Driver’s Door Alarm Delay (if equipped with PASS-Key I1 to have a new key made. In an emergency, Vehicle and Content Theft-Deterrent System) call the Pontiac Roadside Assistance Program at 0 Shock Sensor Enable(if equipped with Vehicle and 1-800-ROADSIm or1-800-762-3743. Content Theft-Deterrent System) To program features, your vehicle must be in the Exit Lighting and Delayed Illumination programming mode. Follow these steps: Exit Lighting: Your interior lights will come on for 1. Put your key in theignition. up to 25 seconds when the key is removed from the ignition switch. 2. Turn the ignition to theRUN pos’itionto disarm the Vehicle and ContentTheft-Deterrent System. Delayed Illumination: Your interior lights will stay on for up to 25 seconds when entering your vehicleand up 3. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. to five seconds when leaving your vehicle. 4. Remove the RADIO fuse. This fuse is in the main Your vehicle comes with both features enabled(Mode 4). fuse block, located on the left side of your To change the factory setting,do the following: instrument panel. See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index. 1. Turn the courtesy lamps on by turning the instrument panel brightness control knob all the way up. 5. Put the ignition in the ACC position: 2. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of You should hear a chime toverify that the system is chimes tells you which mode your vehicleis set for. in programming mode. If the chime sounds once, you will be able to program Exit Lighting, Delayed 3. Turn the courtesy lamp switch to off. Illumination, Last Door Closed Locking and Lockout 4. Turn the courtesy lamp switch from onto off until Prevention only. If the chime sounds twice and your you hear the number of chimes that correspond to the vehicle is equipped with the Vehicle and Content mode selection you want. Theft-Deterrent System, you will also be able to set Remote Lock Control Verification, Arming Method, Mode 1: Both Off Arming Verification, Driver’s Door Delay and Shock Mode 2: Delayed Illumination Only Sensor Enable. Mode 3: Exit Lighting Only Mode 4: Both On

2-18 Last Door Closed Locking and Remote Keyless Entry Lock Verification Lockout Prevention Your vehicle comes with this feature setin Mode 5. This Your vehicle comes with this feature set in Mode 2. This means that when you use the key chain transmitter to means that your power door locks will not lock when lockhnlock your vehicle, your parking lamps will flash the keys are in the ignition and a door is open. To briefly upon the first push on LOCK. Your horn will change the factory setting, do the following: sound briefly, your parking lamps will flash briefly upon the second push on LOCK and your parking lamps will 1. Press the LOCK switch on the door. flash briefly upon any push on UNLOCK. To change the 2. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of factory setting, do the following: chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set for. 1. Press the UNLOCK switch on the Remote Keyless 3. Press the LOCK switch on the door until you hear Entry transmitter. the number of chimes that correspond to the mode 2. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number selection you want. of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is Mode 1: Both O€€(Doors will 1ocWunlock when you set for. press the power door lock switch). 3. Press the UNLOCK switch on the Remote Keyless Mode 2: Lockout Prevention Only (If you leave your Entry transmitter until you hear the number of keys in the ignition and get out the driver’s door, you chimes that correspond to the modeselection won’t be able to lock the doors with the power door you want. lock switch). Mode 3: Last Door Closed Locking Only (If the power door lock switch is used to lock the vehicle while any door is open, you will hear three chimes. Thedoors will not lock until after all doors are closed). Mode 4: Both On (This combines Mode 2 and 3).

2-19 Mode 1: All Off (The headlamps will not flash and the Theft-DetlerrentArming Method horn will not sound to provide you feedback that a Your vehicle comes with this feature set in Mode 3. This lock/ud~&command hasbeen received by the Remote means that both your key chain transmitter and the Lock Control transmitter). power door lock switch will actively arm the system.To Mode 2: Horn and LampdLamps (Your horn will sound change the factory setting, do the following: briefly and your parking lampswill flash when you 1. Press the UNLOCK switch on the door. press LOCK on thekey chain transmitter. Only your parking lamps will flash when you press UNLOCK). 2. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set for, Mode 3: Horn and Lamps (Your horn will sound briefly and your parking lamps willflash every time you push 3. Press the UNLOCK switch on the door until you LOCK and UNLOCK). hear the number of chimes that correspond to the mode selection you want. Mode 4: Lamps (Your parking lamps will flash every time you push LOCK and UNLOCK), Mode I: Alarm System Off (The system will not arm). Mode 5: Lamps/Horn and Lamps/Lamps (Your Mode 2: Key Chain Transmitter Lock (When you lock lamps will flash upon the first push on LOCK, your your doorsusing the Key Chain Transmitter, the system lamps will flask and your horn will sound upon the will arm itself). second push on LOCK and your lamps will flash upon Mode 3: Key Chain TransmittedPower Door Lock any push on UNLOCK). Switch (If you use either the Key Chain Transmitter or the power door lock switch to lock the doors, the system will arm itself). Mode 4: Passive arming and Remote LockControl Transmitter/Power Door Lock Switch Arming(The system will arm itself after all doors are closedplus arming per;mg& 3).

2-20 Theft-Deterrent Arming Verification Mode 1: All Off (No horn chirps or parking lamp flash). Your vehicle comes with this feature set in Mode 3. This Mode 2: Horn and Lamps (Your parking lamps will means that if you arm the system using the key chain flash and your horn will chirp twice to verify the system transmitter, your parking lamps will flash and your horn is armed using any arming method). will chirp twice to verify that the system is armed. If it Mode 3: Horn and Lamps/Lamps (If you use the key only chirps once, the hatch is open or unlatched. If you chain transmitter to arm the system, your parking lamps arm the system using either the power door lock switch will flash and your horn will chirp twice to verify that or by passive arming, only the parking lamps will flash the system is armed. If you use either the power door for verification. To change the factory setting, do lock switch or passive arming, only your lamps will the following: flash for verification). 1. Press the LOCK switch on the key chain transmitter. Mode 4: Lamps (When your vehicle arms, only your 2. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number parking lamps will flash for verification). of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set for. 3. Press the LOCK switch on the key chain transmitter until you hear the number of chimes that correspond to the mode selection you want.

2-21 Driver’s Door Alarm Delay and Shock Mode 1: Zero Delay and Shock SensorDisabled (The Sensor Enable alarm will sound immediately if the driver’s dooris opened with your key and the shock sensorwill not be Your vehicle comes with this feature set in Mode 4. available to measure sharp blowsto your vehicle). This means that if you open the driver’s door using your key, the alarmwill not sound for eight seconds. Mode 2: Eight Second Delay and Shock Sensor Also the shock sensor, able to detect sharp blows to Disabled (The alarm will sound eight seconds after the your vehicle, is active. To change the factory setting, do driver’s door is opened with your key and the shock the following: sensor will not be available to measure sharp blows to your vehicle), 1. Turn the parking lamps on and off, Mode 3: Zero Relay and Shock Sensor Enabled (The 2. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number alum will sound immediately after the driver’s door is of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is opened with your key and the shock sensor will be set for. available to measure sharp blows to your vehicle). 3. Turn the parking lamps on andoff until you hear the Mode 4: Eight Second Delay and Shock SensorEnabled number of chimes that correspond to the mode (The alarm will sound eight seconds after the driver’s selection you want. door is opened with your key and the shock sensor will be available to measure sharpblows to your vehicle). Leaving Programming Mode When programming is done, turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and replace theRADIO fuse.

2-22 New Vehicle “Break-In” Ignition Switch

C NOTICE: I

Your modern Pontiac doesn’t needan elaborate D “break-in.” But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow these guidelines: a Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 kmh) or less for the first500 miles (805 km). a Don’t drive at any one speed-- fast or slow -- for the first 500 miles (805 km). A E Don’t make full-throttle starts. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time your new brake linings aren’t yet broken With the ignition key in theignition switch, you can turn in. Hard stops with new liningscan mean the switch to five positions. premature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline every ACC (A): Position in which you can operateyour electrical power accessories. Press in the ignition switch time you get new brake linings. as you turn the top of it toward you. a Don’t tow a trailer during break-in. See “Towinga Trailer’’ in the Index for LOCK (B): The only position in which you can remove more information. the key. This locks your steering wheel, ignition an’d automatic transmission.

2-23 If you have an automatic transmission, the ignition Key Release Button switch can’t be turned to LOCK unless the shift lever is in the PARK (P) position. If you have a manual transmission, your ignition OFF (C): Unlocks the steering wheel, ignition and lock has a key release automatic transmission, but does not send electrical button. You must press the power to any accessories. Use this position if your button before you can take vehicle must be pushed or towed. A warning tone will your key outof the sound if you open the driver’s door when the ignition is ignition lock. in OFF and the key is in the ignition. RUN (D): Position to which the switch returns after you start your engine and release the switch. The switch stays in the RUN position when the engine is running, But even when the engine is notrunning, you can use RUN to operate your electrical power accessories and to display some instrumentpanel warning and indicator lights. START (E): Starts the engine. When the engine starts, On manual transmission vehicles, turn g the key release the key. The ignition switch will return to RUN to LOCK will lock the steering columnand result €or normal driving. in a lossof ability to steer the vehicle. This could Note that even if the engine is not running, ACC and cause a collision. If you need to turn the engine RUN allow you to operate yourelectrical accessories, off while the vehicle is moving, turn the key only such as the radio and ventilation fan. to OFF. Don’t press the key release button while the vehicleis moving.

2-24 Starting Your Engine NOTICE: Automatic Transmission If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can’t Move your snm lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). turn it, be sure you are using the correct key; if Your engine won’t startin any other position-- that’s a so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the safety feature.To restart when you’re already moving, steering wheel left and rightwhile you turn the use NEUTRAL (N) only. key hard. But turn the key only withyour hand. Using a tool to force it could break the key or the ignition switch.If none of this works, then your NOTICE:

~~ vehicle needs service. Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your Pontiac is moving. If you do, you coulddamage the transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your vehicle isstopped.

2-25 Manual Transmission 3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Trypushing The gear selector should bein NEUTRAL (N). Hold the your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and clutch pedal to the floor and start the engine. Your holding it there as you hold the keyin START for about vehicle won’t start if the clutch pedalis not all the way three seconds. If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops down -- that’s a safety feature. again, do the same thing, but this time keep the pedal 1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your down for five or six seconds. This clears the extra ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let gasoline from the engine. After waiting about go of the key. The idle speed willgo down as your 15 seconds, repeat the normal starting procedure. engine gets warm. NOTICE: NOTICE: Your engine is designedto work with the Holding your key in START for longer than electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be parts oraccessories, you could change theway drained muchsooner. And the excessive heat can the engine operates. Before adding electrical damage your startermotor. equipment, checkwith your dealer. If you don’t, your engine might not perform properly. 2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your key in If you ever haveto have yourvehicle towed, see START for about three tofive seconds at a time until the partof this manual that tellshow to do it your engine starts. Wait about 15 seconds between without damaging yourvehicle. See “Towing each try to helpavoid draining your battery. Your Vehicle” in the Index.

2-26 Engine Coolant Heater(If Equipped) 3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

Plugging the cord intoan ungrounded outlet could causean electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cord could overheatand cause a fire.You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cordwon't reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong extension cord ratedfor at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and In very cold weather, 0°F (- 18"C) or colder, the engine store the cord as it was before to keep it away from coolant heater can help. You'll get easier starting and hot pipes, manifold or any moving engine parts. If better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually, ' you don't, it could be damaged. the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the To Use the Coolant Heater kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact 1. Turn off the engine. your Pontiac dealer in the area where you'll be parking 2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area. 2-27 Automatic Transmission Operation PARK (a):This locks your rear wheels. It’s the best position to use when you start your engine because your vehicle can’t move easily,

It is dangerous to getout of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brakefirmly set. Your vehicle can roll. Don’t leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to.If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’reon fairly There are several different positions for your shift lever. level ground, always setyour parking brake and move the shift leverto PARK (P). See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. If you’re pullinga trailer, see “Towing aTrailer” in the Index.

2-28 Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) range before NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine starting the engine. Your Pontiac has a doesn’t connectwith the wheels. To restart when you’re Brake-Transmission Shift Interlock. You have to fully already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use apply your regular brakes before you can shift from NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed. PARK (P) when the ignition key is in theRUN position. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on A 1 the shift lever -- push the shift lever all the way into A CAUTION: PARK (P) and also release the shift lever button on floor shift console models as you maintain brake application. Then move the shift lever into the‘gearyou wish. (Press Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while the shift lever button before moving the shift lever on your engine is “racing” (running at high speed) is floor shift console models.) See “Shifting Out of dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly onthe PARK, (P) in this section. brake pedal, your vehicle could movevery rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up. objects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing. I NOTICE: Shifting to REVERSE (R)while your vehicle is moving forward could damage your NOTICE: transmission. Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is stopped. Damage to your transmission caused by shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, engine racing isn’t coveredby you warranty. ice or sand without damaging your transmission, see “Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index. 2-29 AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (0):This position is for SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but normal driving.If you need more power for passing, lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills. and you’re: It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to use - Going less than about 35 mph (56 kdln), push your your brakes off and 0n. accelerator pedal about halfway down. - Going about 35 mph (56 kdh) or more, push the accelerator all the way down. You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power. Don’t drive in SECOND (2) for more than 25 miles (40 km), or at speeds over 55 mph THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal (88 km/h), or can damage your transmission. driving, however, it offers more power and lower fuel you Use AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE(@) or economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (@). THIRD (3) as much as possible. Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3) Don’t shift intoSECUND (2) unless you are going instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (0); slower than 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can - When driving on hilly, winding roads. damage your engine. - When towing a trailer, so there is less shifting between gears. - When going down a steep hill.

2-30 FIRST (1): This position (if equipped) gives you Second-Gear Start(If Equipped) even more power (but lower fuel economy)than (3800 Engine) SECOND (2). You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the selector lever is put in first gear, the transmission won’t shift into FIRST (1) until the vehicle is going slowly enough.

NOTICE:

If your rear wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to drive. Thismight happen if you were stuck in very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid object. You could damage your transmission. Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold your vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal. This could overheat and damage the transmission.Use Your vehicle may be equipped with a second-gear start feature. Press 2ND GEAR START to provide more your brakesor shift intoPARK (P) to hold your traction when you are starting on iceor other slippery vehicle in position ona hill. surfaces. A light on the switch will illuminate when the 2nd gear start is selected. The transmission will be in Maximum enginespeed is limited to protect driveline SECOND (2) gear when the vehicle begins to move. components from improper operation. After starting in SECOND (2) gear, the vehicle will upshift normally.

2-31 This featureis for improved traction only ,when the road FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into surface is slippery and is not intended for continuous use FIRST (1). Then slowly let up on the clutch pedal as or when the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice, snow or you press the accelerator pedal. gravel. Always use NORMAL for normal road You can shift into FIRST (1) when you’re going less conditions. You may press the 2ND GEAR START than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you’ve come to a complete switch again to turn off this feature. The light on the stop and it’s hard to shift into FIRST (l),put the shift switch will go out. Whenever you start your vehicle, the lever in NEUTRAL (N) and let up on the clutch,Press transmission is in the NORMAL mode. the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST(1). Manual Transmission SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal to the flooras you let up on the accelerator pedal and shift into 5-Speed SECOND (2). Then, slowly letup on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. This isyour shift pattern. Here’s how to operate THIRD (3), FOURTH (4), and FIFTH (5): Shift into 1 3 5 your transmission: THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5)the same way you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. To Stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, pressthe 2 4 R clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to NEUTRAL (N), NEUTRAL (N): Use this position when you start or idle your engine.

2-32 REVERSE (R): To back up, press down the clutch pedal and shift into REVERSE (R). Letup on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal. 1 3 5 NOTICE:

Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicleis stopped. Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is moving could damage your transmission.

Also, use REVERSE (R), alongwith the parking brake, for parking your vehicle. This is your shift pattern.Here’s how to operate your transmission: FIRST (1): Press the clutch and shift into FIRST(1). Then, slowly letup on the clutch pedalas you press the accelerator pedal. You can shift into FIRST(1) when you’re going less than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you’ve come to a complete stop and it’s hard to shift to FIRST(l), put the shift lever in NEUTRAL (N) and letup on the clutch. Press the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST(1).

2-33 SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal asyou let up on REVERSE (R):To back up, press down the clutch the accelerator pedal and shift intoSECOND (2). Then, pedal and shift intoREVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch slowly let up on the clutch pedalas you press the pedal slowly while pressing the acceleratorpedal. If you accelerator pedal. shift fromSIXTH (6) into REVERSE (R), the shift lever must be first placed in NEUTRAL(N) position centered THIRD (3), FOURTH (4), FIFTH (5) and between SECOND (2) and THIRD (3) prior to shifting SIXTH (6): Shift into THIRD(3), FOURTH (4), into REVERSE (R). FIFTH (5)and SIXTH (4) the same way you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch pedalas you Your six-speed manual transmission has a feature that press the accelerator pedal. allows you safely to shift into REVERSE (R) while the vehicle is rolling at lessthan 5 mph (8 km/h). You will To Stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and pressthe be locked-out if you try to shift into REVERSE(R) brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops,press the while your vehicle is movins fa ’ :r than 5 mph clutch pedal and the brake pedal and shift to (8 km/h). NEUTRAL (N). If you have turned your ignition off and want to park NEUTRAL (N): Use this positionwhen you start or your car in REVERSE (R), you will have to move the idle your engine. shift lever quicklyto the right,then forward into gear.

2-34 Skip Shift When this light is on, the gear shift lever will let you shift from FIRST (1) to FOURTH (4) gear only. Once When this light comes on, you are in FOURTH (4) gear, you can press the clutch you can only shift from again and shift into another gear. FIRST (1) tQ FOURTH '(4) Follow the shift speeds in thischart when the gear instead of FIRST (1) to SKIP SHIFT lightis on. SKIP SECOND (2) gear. This SHIFT helps you to get the best Computer Aided Manual Transmission Shift Speeds possible fuel economy. 1st to 4th: 15 mph (24 kdh)

0 4th to 5th: 25 mph (40 km/h)* 5th to 6th: 40 mph (64 km/h)** Each time you come to a stop, the engine's Powertrain This light will come on under these conditions: Control Module (PCM) determines when to activate the 0 The engine coolant temperature is greater than SKIP SHIFT upshift system. Use SECOND (2)gear 170°F (77°C). only when you accelerate very quickly from a stop. You can then follow the full gear shift pattern. You are going 15 to 20 mph (24 to 32 km/h) and *30 mph (48 kmh) when accelerating to 0 You are at 35 percent throttle or less. highway speeds. **45 mph (72 km/h) when accelerating to highway speeds.

2-35 Shift Speeds If your speed drops below 20 mph (30 km/h), or if the engine is not running smoothly, you should downshiftto the next lower gear. You may have to downshifttwo or more gears tokeep the engine running smoothlyor for good performance. If pull skip more thanone gear waienyou Limited-Slip Rear Axle downshift, you could lose controlof your vehicle. If you have this feature, your rear axle can giveyou And you could injure yourselfor others. Don’t additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand orgravel. It shift fromSIXTH (6) to THIRD (3), or FIFTH (5: works like a standard axle most of the time, butwhen to SECOND (2) or FOURTH (4) to FIRST (1). one of the rear wheels hasno traction and the other does, the limited-sliplocking feature will allow the wheel with traction to move thevehicle. This chart shows when to shift to the next higher gear for best fuel economy.

RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS,IN MPH (kmfh) I MANUAL TRANSMISSION , Acceloratlen Shlft Speed Engine it02 I 2to3 I 3to4 I 4to5 I St06 45-47 (72-75) I N’A

2-36 Parking Brake

To release the parking brake,hold the brakepedal down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can push in the To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down and release button. Hold the release button in as you move pull up onthe parking brake lever. If the ignition is on, the brake lever all the way down. the brake systemwarning light will come on.

2-37 Shifting Into PARK (P) (Automatic I NOTICE: Transmission Models Only) Driving withthe parking brakeon can cause your rear brakes tooverheat. You may have to replace them, and you could alsodamage other parts of your vehicle. It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the If you are towing a trailer and are parlung on any hill, parking brake firmly set. Your vehiclecan roll. see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. That section shows If you have left the engine running, the vehicle what to do first to keep the trailerfrom moving. can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. If you’re pulling a trailer, see ‘(Towing a Trailer’’ in the Index.

2-38 Leaving YourVehicle With the Engine Running (Automatic Transmission Models Only)

It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running. Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the parking brakefirmly set. And,if you leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat and even catch fire. You or others could Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the set the parking brake. engine running unless youhave to. 2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) position by holding in the button on the lever and pushing the lever all the way toward the front of your vehicle. 3. Move the ignition key to LOCK. 4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

2-39 Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission) Shifting Out of PARK (P) If you areparking on a hill and you don’t shift your (Automatic Transmission) transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the Your Pontiac has a brake-transmission shift interlock. vehicle may put too much forceon the parking pawl in You have tofully apply your regular brake beforeyou the transmission. You may find itdifficult to pull the can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition isin the shift lever outof PARK (P). Thisis called “torque lock.” RUN position. See “Automatic Trans---’ssion” in To prevent torque lock, set theparking brake andthen the Index. shift into PARK (P) properly beforeyou leave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into PARK If you cannot shift outof PARK (P), ease pressure on (P)” in the Index. the shift lever -- push the shift leverall the way into PARK (P) and release the shift lever buttonas you When you are ready to drive, movethe shift lever outof maintain brake application. Then press the shift lever PARK (P) before you release theparking brake. button and move the shift lever into the gearyou wish. If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another If you ever hold the brake pedal down but can’tstill vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the shift out of PARK (P), try this: pressure from the parking pawl in transmission,the so you can pull theshift lever outof PARK (P). 1. Turn the key to OFF. Parking Your Vehicle 2. Apply and hold the brake. (Manual Transmission) 3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N). Before you get outof your vehicle, put yourmanual 4. Start the vehicle andthen shift to the drive gear transmission in REVERSE (R) and firmly apply the you want. parking brake. 5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can. If your vehicle is equipped to tow a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index,

2-40 Parking Over Things That Burn Engine Exhaust

...... rn...... Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas carbon monoxide (CO),which you can’t see or smell. It can cause unconsciousnessand death. You might have exhaust coming in if: 0 Your exhaust system sounds strange or different. Your vehicle gets rusty underneath. 0 Your vehicle was damaged in a collision. 0 Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on theroad or over road debris. 0 Repairs weren’t done correctly. Your vehicle or exhaust system had been modified improperly. A CAUTION: If you ever suspect exhaust is cominginto I I your vehicle: Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust 0 Drive it only with all the windows down to parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park blow out any CO; and over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that 0 Have your vehicle fixed immediately. can burn. Running Your Engine While You’re Parked (Automatic Transmission) A CAUTION: It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if er haveto, here are some things...fl,.:?=....v,>tg kngw,. ,:+:-., i::, ,..>?pd;y. the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brakefirmly set, Your vehicle can roll. Don’t leaveyour vehicle whenthe engine is running unless youhave to. If you’ve left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. Idling the engine withthe air system control off could allow dangerous exhaust into yourvehicle You or others could be injured. ‘Bo be sure your (see the earlier Caution under <‘Engine Exhaustss), vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and Also, idling in a closed-in placecan let deadly move the shift PWW to P;ARK (P). carbon monoxide (CU) into yourvehicle even if the fan switch is at the highest setting.One place this can happen is a garage. Exhaust -- with Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t CO -- can come in easily. NEVER park ina move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. garage with the engine running. If you are parking on a hill andif you’re pulling a Another closed-in placecan be a blizzard, (See trailer, also see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. “Blizzard” in theIndex.)

2-42 Windows You can open the passenger’s window any amount by pressing the switch and releasing it when the window Manual Windows has lowered to the position you want. Rotate the window crank handle to open and close each The switch for the driver’s window has an express-down door window. feature. Quickly press and release the switch for the driver’s window and the window will lower completely. Power Windows (If Equipped) You can also open the driver’s window any amount by pressing the switch again while the window is in the express-down mode when it has lowered to the position you want. Horn To sound the horn, press either horn symbol on your steering wheel. If your horn sounds two or three chirps when unlocking your vehicle with the transmitter (if you have that option), the alarm was triggered while you were away. Check the vehicle before entering.

With power windows, switches on the door control each window when the ignition is on or when RAP is present. (See “Retained Accessory P’ower’’ inthe Index.)

2-43 Tilt Steering Wheel Thrn SignaVMultifunction Lever

A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust thesteering The lever on the left side of the steering column wheel before you drive. includes your: You can also raise it to the highest level to give your 0 Turn Signal and Lane Chaaage Indicator legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle. 0 Headlamp HighLow Beam Changer and To tilt the wheel, hold the steeringwheel and pull the Passing Signal lever. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level, Windshield Wipers then release thelever to lock the wheelin place. Windshield Washer Cruise Control (Option)

2-44 Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator As you signal a turn or a lanechange, if the arrows don’t flash but just stay on, a signal bulb may be burned out The turn signal has twoupward (for right) and two and other drivers won’t see your turn signal. downward (for left) positions. Thesepositions allow you to signal aturn or a lane change. If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you To signal a turn, move the,lever all the way up or down. signal aturn, check the fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit When the turn is finished, the lever will return Breakers” in the Index). automatically. Headlamp High/Low Beam An arrow on the instrument panel will flash in the To change the headlamps direction of the turn or from low beam to high or lane change. high to low, pull the turn signal lever all the way toward you. Then release it. When the high beams are on, this light on the instrument panel also will be on.

To signal a lanechange, just raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete your lane change.The lever will return by itself when you release it.

2-45 Windshield Wipers You can set the wiper speed for a long or shortdelay between wipes. This can bevery useful in light rain or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time. The closer to LO, the shorter the delay. For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band away from you to the LO position, Forhigh-speed wiping, turn the band further, to HI, To stop the wipers, move the band to OFF. Damaged wiper blades may prevent you from seeing well enough to drive safely. To avoid damage, be sureto clear ice and snow fromthe wiper blades before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become damaged, get new blades or blade inserts, Heavy snow or icecan overload your wipers. A circuit You control the windshield wipers by turning the band breaker will stop them until the motor cools. Clear away with the wiper symbol on it. snow or ice to prevent an overload. For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to MIST. Hold it there until the wipers start, then let go. The wipers will stop after one cycle. If you want more cycles, hold the band on MIST longer.

2-46 Windshield Washer Cruise Control At the top of the turn signal lever, there’s a paddle with the word PUSH on it. To spray washer fluid on the windshield, just push the paddle for less than a second. The washer will continue to spray until you release the paddle. The wipers will clear the window and wipe a few more times before stopping or returning to the previous setting. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index.

With cruise control,you can maintain a speed of ab’out n freezing weather, don’t I :your was1 r until 25 mph (40 kmh) or more without keeping your foot on the windshieldis warmed. Otherwise the washer the accelerator. This can really help on long trips. Cruise fluid canform ice on the windshield, blocking control doesnot work at speeds below about 25 mph your vision. (40 kmh). When you apply your brakes, or push the clutch pedal, if you havea manual transmission, the ‘cruisecontrol shuts off.

2-47 Setting Cruise Control

~ ~~~

Cruise control can be dangerous where you can’t drive safely at a steady speed. So, don’t use your cruise control on winding If you leave your cruise controlswitch on when roads or in heavy traffic. you’re not using cruise, you mighthit a button and go into cruise when you don’twant to. You could 0 Cruise control ‘canbe dangerous on slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes be startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise in tire tractioncan cause needless wheel control switchOFF until you wantto use it. spinning, and you cauld lose control. Don’t use cruise control on slippery roads.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the optional traction control system beginsto limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically disengage. (See “Traction Control System” in the Index.) When road conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may turn the cruise control back on.

2-48 1. Move the cruise control switch toON. Resuming a Set Speed

Suppose you set your cruise control aat desired speed 2. Get up to the speedyou want. and thenapply the brake or clutch pedal. This, of course, shuts off the cruise control. Butyou don't need to reset 3. Push in theSET button at theend of the lever and it. Once you're going about25 mph (40 km/h) or more, release it. you can movethe cruise control switch fromON to' 4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. R/A (Resume/Accelerate) for about halfa second. You'll go rightback up to your chosen speed and stay there. Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control There are twoways to go to a higher speed: Use the accelerator pedal to increaseyour speed. When Use the acceleratorpedal to get to the higher speed. you take your foot off the pedal, your vehiclewill slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier. 0 Push the button at the end of the lever, then release the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now Using Cruise Controlon Hills cruise at the higher speed. How well your cruise control will workon hills depends 0 To increase your speed in very small amounts, move upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills. the switch to WA for less than half a second and then When going up steep hills, you may have to step on the release it. Each time you do this, your vehicle will go accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. Whengoing about 1 rnph (1.6 kmh) faster. downhill, you may have to brake or shift toa lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course, applyingthe brake rn Move the cruiseswitch from ON to WA. Hold it takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to there until you get up to the speed you want, and be too much trouble and don’t use cruise control on then release theswitch. steep hills. Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control Ending Out of Cruise Csntrol There are two ways to reduce your speed while using There are several ways to turn off the cruisecontrol: cruise control: rn Step lightly on the brake pedal or push the clutch 0 Push in the button at the end of the lever until you pedal, if you have a manual transmission ; OR reach the lower speedyou want, then release it. rn Movk the cruise switch to OFF. e To slow down in very small amounts,push the button for less than half a second. Eachtime you do Erasing Speed Memory this, you’ll go 1 mpk (1.6 km/h) slower. When you turn off the cruise controlor the ignition, your cruise control set speed memory is erased.

2-50 ~- Lamps -'Q-, This setting turns on your headlamps and other operating lamps. 0 II pi This setting turns on your parking lamps without your headlamps. Turn the knob to OFF to turn off the lamps. Headlamps On Reminder If you turn the ignition off and leavethe lamps on, you will hear a chime lasting up to 5 seconds. If the lamps are still on when you open the driver's door, the chime will sound again.

The main lamp control is a knobthat works these lamps: Headlamps Taillamps Parking lamps Licenselamps Sidemarker lamps Instrument panel lights

2-51 Headlamp Doors The headlamp doors shouldbe open when driving in icy or snowy conditions to prevent the doors from freezing closed and when washing the vehicle to help clean the headlamps. You can open the headlamp doors manually: 1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the plastic cover from the retractor motor knob. 3. Turn the retractor motor knob counterclockwise until the headlamp dooris fully open. The knob will get harder to turn when the headlamp dooris all the way up. 4. Replace the plastic cover on the retractor motor knob. The headlamp doors are designedto open when you turn To manually close the headlamp doors,turn the lamps the headlamps on and close when you turn the o€€and turn the knob clockwise. If the headlamp doors headlamps off. The headlamp doors canbe opened aren’t working properly, see your Pontiac dealer without turning on the headlamps by turning the for help. headlamps on, thenturning the switch back to the parking lamps position.

2-52 Daytime Running Lamps On a non-Canadian vehicle the headlamps haveto be turned on manuallywhen you need them. When the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can makeit easier for headlamps are turned on, the front turn signal lamps others to seethe front of your vehicle during theday. will go out. Whenyou use yourturn signals, the front DRL can be helpful inmany different driving turn signal lamp and the taillampon the desired side conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the will flash. short periods after dawn and before sunset. As with any vehicle, you should turn OM the regular In Canada, a light sensor on topof the instrument headlamp systemwhen you need it. panel automatically turns the headlamps on,so be sure it isn’t covered. Fog Lamps (If Equipped) The DRL system will makeyour front turn signal lamps Use your fog lamps for bettervision in foggy or misty come onwhen: conditions. Your parking lampsmust be on oryour fog The ignition is on, lamps won’t work. The headlamp switch is OFF and 0s To turn the fog lamps on, push the right side of the fog lamp switch. Push the left sideof the switchto turn 0 The parking brake is released. the fog lampsoff. A light on the switchwill come on When the DRL are on, only your front turn signal lamps when the fog lamps are on. will be on. The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps Fog lamps willgo off whenever your high beams come won’t be on. Your instrument panel won’tbe lit up either. on. When the high beamsgo off, thefog lamps will For Canadian vehicles whenit’s dark enough outside, come on again. your front turn signal lamps will go out yourand If your vehicle is equipped with the Vehicle and Content headlamps will come on. The other lamps that comeon Theft-Deterrent System and yourfog lamp switch is on, with your headlamps will also come on. When it’s bright the fog lamps may flash to indicate operationof the enough outside, the regular lampswill go off, and your Vehicle and Content Theft-DeterrentSystem. See “Vehicle front turn signal lampswill come on. and Content Theft-Deterrent System”in the Index.

2-53 Interior Lamps 3. Press any button on your Remote. Lock Control transmitter. Instrument Panel Brightness Control 4. Turn the int’eriorlamp switch fromoff to on. This switch controls the brightness of your 5. Open the hatch. instrument panel lights. Turn the switch upward to brighten or dim the lights,If you turn the switch all the Delayed Illumination way up, your courtesy lampswill come on. With delayed illumination, the courtesy lamps will stay Courtesy Lamps on for 25 seconds after you close the doors when entering the vehicle. They will stay on for five seconds When any door is opened, several interior lamps go on. after you close the doors when exiting the vehicle. The These lamps are courtesy lamps. They makeit easier for times will be shortened if the ignition is turned to the you to enter and leave your vehicle. RUN position or if the power locks are activated.To Courtesy lamps include the dome lamp and other lamps turn this feature on or off, see “Feature Customizatian” throughout the interior of your vehicle. in the Index. To prevent battery rundown, your interior lamps will be Exit Lighting disabled about 10 minutes after the ignition is turned to OFF. The 10 minute timer will be restarted if you do any With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on when of the following; you remove the key from the ignitionto help you see while exiting the vehicle. To turn this feature on oroff, 1, Turn the ignition on. see “Feature Customization” in the Index, 2. Open either door.

2-54 Front Map Lamps Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Your vehicle is equipped with a Retained Accessory Power (RAP) feature which will allow certain features of your vehicle to continue to work up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned to OFF. Your convertible top, power windows, and audio system will work when the ignition key is in theRUN or ACC positions. Once thekey is turned fromRUN to OFF, these features will continue to work for up to 10 minutes or until either door is opened. Your power door unlock and remote hatch release features will work when the ignition key is in the RUN or ACC positions or if either door is open.Once the key is turned to OFF, these features will continue towork €or up to 10 minutes. If either door is open and the ignition Your inside rearview mirror includes two map lamps. key is OFF, these features will continue towork until Each lamp has its own switch. Use the switch closest to both doors have been closed for about30 seconds or the lamp to turn it on. The lampswill also go on when a until the theft-deterrent system arms. Atthat time, both door is opened. the power door unlock and remote hatch release features will be disabled to enhance the security of the vehicle. The power door lock function will work at all times except during Lockout Prevention(if this featureis enabled). See “Lockout Prevention’’ in the Index.

2-55 Mirrors Outside Manual Adjustable Mirror Adjust the passengefs side outside mirror by hand so Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror that you can just see the side of your vehicle when you are sitting in a comfortable drivingposition. i Manual Remote Control Mirror Adjust the driver’s side outside mirror with the lever on the door. Adjust the mirror so that you just see the side of your vehicle when you are sitting in a comfortable driving position.

An inside rearview mirror is attached to your windshield. The mirror has pivots so that you can adjust it. You can adjustthe minor for day or night driving. Pull the tab for night driving to reduce glare. Push the tab for daytime driving.

2-56 Power Remote Control Mirror(If Equipped) Convex Outside Mirror Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the driver’s seat.

A convex mirror can make things (like other vehicles) look farther away than they really are. If you cut too sharplyinto the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your inside mirroror glance over your shoulder before

~~~~~~ ~ ~ changing lanes.

The power mirror control is on the driver’s door. To adjust either mirror, move the center switch to left (L)or right (R). (The Center position is “OFF”). Then use the touch pad to adjust the mirror.

2-57 Storage Compartments Close-Out Panel Glove Box To open the glove box, lift up on the lev'er. Use your door key to lock and unlock it, The glove b'ox has a lamp inside. Front Console To use the storage are'a, push the tab andpull up on the front end of the console. There is a cupholder on the console, The console will also have a storage area. Cassette and CompactDisc Storage If you have a compact disc player, the console can be used for storing your compact discs. The close-out panel can be closedfor hidden storage in Map Pocket (If Equipped) the rear area of your vehicle. To remove the 'close-outpanel Each door has a map pocket. There may also be amap pocket on the back of the seats. 1. Close the panel. If the close-out panel is not closed and resting on the trim panel, it cannot be removed. 2. Pull the panel toward you to unsnap it. Then slide the close-out panel along the groove in the trim panel. Reverse the steps to install the panel.

2-58 Ashtray and Lighter Lift up the cover to open the ashtray. To remove it, lift up on either side of the ashtray. If you have an automatic transmission, the ashtray is near the front of your console. If you have a manual transmission, the ashtray is near your cupholder.

I NOTICE: Don’t put papers and otherthings that burn into your ashtray. If you do, cigarettes or other smoking materials could set them on fire, When carrying largeor heavy items, it isa good idea to causing damage. open the panel and place the itemsin the rear area. To use the lighter, push it inall the way and let go. When it’sready, it will pop back by itself.

I An improperly stored close-out panel could be thrown about the vehicle during a collision or sudden maneuver. You or others could be injured. If you removethe cover, alwaysstore it outside your vehicle. When youput it back, always besure thatit is securelyreattached. 2-59 Sun Visors I NOTICE: \ Don? hold a cigarette lighterin with your hand while itis heating. If you do, it won9tbe able to back awayfrom the heating element when it’s \ ready. That can make it overheat, damaging the lighter and the heating element.

If you plug accessories intoyour cigarette lighter, such as heating devices or air ~ompressors,these accessories should have a rated currentof less than 15 amps. Exceeding this limitwill result in ablown fuse.

To block out glare,YOU can swing down the visors. You can also swing them to the side. The elastic bands on your visor provide extra storage formaps or papers. Covered Visor Vanity Mirror Full down the sun visor and lift the cover to expose the vanity mirror.

2-60 Accessory Plug We recornend that you see a qualified technician or your dealer for the proper installationof your equipment. This plug is located inside the frontsection ahead of the shift leverin the console.The plug can be used to Floor Mats connect electrical equipment suchas a cellular phoneor CB radio. Be sureto follow the installation instructions Your Firebird's floor matsare custom fitted to thefloor included with the equipment. wells. Be sure the driver's floor mat is in place. If it isn't, it could interfere with the acceleratoror brake pedal. The plug has three separate wires: The orange wire connects to the battery. Twin Lift-off Roof Panels The pink wire connects to the ignition. Power is only (If Ecvir-ed) available in RUN. The black wire connects to the ground.

NOTICE: Don't try tryto remove the T-top panels while the vehicle is moving. Trying to remove the T-toy When usingthe accessory plug: panel while the vehicle is moving could causean accident. The panel could fall into thevehicle anc The maximum load of any electrical cause you to lose control, or itcould fly off and equipment should not exceed 3 amps. strike anothervehicle. You or others could be 0 Be sure toturn off any electrical equipment injured. Remove T-toppanels only when the when not in use. Leaving electrical vehicle is parked. equipment on for extended periods can drain yourbattery. The door key unlocks the panels. The lock is over the Then push on the release handle to unlatch the panel. Lift front door window. Turn the key to the leftto unlock the outer edge of the panel and pull it toward you. Then the panel. carry the panel to the rear of the vehicle for storage.

2-62 If the T-top panelis not stored properly, it could be thrown about the vehicle ina crash or sudden maneuver. People in the vehicle could be injured. Whenever you store the roof panelin the vehicle, always be sure thatit is stored securelyin the correct storage slot with the T-top handle closed.

Open the close-out panel completely. Place the panel in the correct slot (DRIVER) or (PASSENGER) in therear area of your vehicle. Make sure the handle isopen and facing you when you put it in the storage slot.

2-63 An improperly ins'talled panel may fall into or fly off the vehicle. You or others could be injured. After installing a T-top panel, always checkthat it is firmly attached by pushing up on the underside of the panel.

NOTICE:

Push the handle closedto secure the panel the slot. in To ~ High pressure car washes may cause water to lock e'ach panel inthe storage area, use your door key. ~ enter your vehicle. Never spray water directly at the roof panel joints. This will cause leaks.

2-64 Reverse the steps to remove the T-top panels from storage.

t

NOTICE: 1. When installing the panelsto the roof, keep the outboard edgeof the panelraised about 3 inches Do not attempt to install the panels by sliding above the roof while placing the inboard edgeof them horizontally towards the center roof rail. the panel under the centerroof rail. Doing so may cause the weatherstrips to be 2. After the inboard edge of the panel is in position aligned improperly, which may resultin leaks under the center roof rail, lower the outboard edge and possible damageto the weatherstrips. of the panel into position, close the latchand lock the T-top. T-Top Sunshades

i

3. Open the latch and close theT-top. Check to see if there are any gaps showing, Unlatch the T-top and 1, Start with the panel markedDRIVER FRONT. adjust the sunshade as required. Unlatch the driver’s side T-top, raise it halfway and close the latch handle. 4, Once the sunshadeis installed properly, you can stick the Velcro@buttons on the glass for a proper fit 2. With the top raised and resting onthe center roof every time you install the sunshades. To do this, first rail, slide the flat edge of the sunshadepanel (with remove theT-top with the sunshade installed and the vinyl side to the glass)between the glass and place it upside down on a table or bench, Take care plastic trim, making sure the edge marked DRIVER not to scratch the glass. FRONT is pointing to the frontof the vehicle.

2-66 5. Pull the sunshade back a little and remove the You can store the sunshades twodifferent ways: backing paper from the Velcro buttons. Push the When the T-tops are in use, store the sunshades in their sunshade back into place,sticking the Velcro to storage area in the rear of the vehicle, and make sure the glass. the close-out panel is in its closed, upright position. 6. Installthe T-top, close the latchand lock the T-top. When you have the T-tops off and in their storage Repeat the above steps for the passenger-side sunshade. slots, store the sunshades onthe T-tops, in their installed positions.

2-67 Convertible Top NOTICE: The following procedures explain the proper operation of your convertible top. Bun%lower the top if it is damp 'or wet. When Lowering Your Convertible Top the top is down, trapped water can cause stains, mildew and damage to the inside of your vehicle. Be sure todry off the top before youlower it. NOTICE:

Don't leave your convertible out with the top down for any long periods 'of time. The sun and NOTICE: the rain can damage your seat material and other things inside your vehicle. It is'not recommended to lower the top if your vehicle is out in cold weather, 0°F (-18"C) or 1. Park on a level surface. Set the parking brake firmly, lower, or you may damage top components. shift an automatic transmission into PARK (PI or a manual transmission into REVERSE (R). The ignition must be in the ACC or RUN position. Lower both sun visors.

2-68 ~~~~ Manual Automatic Transmission Transmission 3. Be sure no one or nothing is on or around the top. Push andhold the bottomof the convertible top I NOTICE: switch. The switch is on the left side of your console for a manual transmission and in frontof the gear Before lowering the convertible top into the shift lever for automatic transmissions. Thetop will storage area, be sure there areno objects in the automatically lower into the storage area. way of thefolded, stored top. The weight of a stored topon items in the storage area will cause the convertible top back glassto break.

2. Unlock the front of the convertibletop by pushing on the smaller part of the latch, then pulling downon the larger part of the latch. Be sure the hook onthe latch that attaches into thehole at the windshield releases. Installing the Boot Cover After lowering the convertible top, you may want to install the boot cover, Thethree-piece boot cover is stored in a bag in the trunk.

3. Install the middle section of the cover by sliding the tabs into the slots on the right side cover. Lower the cover and engage thelatch. 4. Close the trunk.

1. Open the trunk and remove the two side covers from the storage bag. 2. Install the two side coversby engaging the tab into the front seatbelt cover. Lower the covers onto the vehicle.

2-70 Raising Your Convertible Top 1. Park on a level surface. Set the parking brake firrnly. If you have an automatic transmission, shift into PARK (P). If you have a manual transmission,shift into REVERSE (R). The ignition must be in theACC or RUN position or RAP must be on. Lower both sun visors. Lower both windows at least3 inches (8 cm). If the boot cover isin place, it must be removed first.

3. Remove the two side pieces of the boot cover by lifting the rear cover and sliding them outof their slots.

2. Open the trunk. Remove the middle pieceof the cover by pushing in on thelatch and lifting up on the cover. ~~~ ~ Manual Automatic 7lkansmission Transmission 5, Push and hold the top of the convertible top switch. 4. Store eachpiece of the cover in its separate compartment in the storagebag. Store in the trunk and close the hatch.

2-72 6. Pull down on the center opening and align the hooks Open the trunk and find the tab along the left side trim with the holes.Push forward on the larger part of the panel. Lift up the tab and turn the valveclockwise to latch until it clicks. Do not forcethe latch. If it is release the hydraulicpressure. Turn the ignition key to hard to lock,the top is not properly aligned. the LOCK position. You can now raise or lower your top manually. Be sure to close the valve afterinstalling your If your vehicle suffers a power loss, such as a dead top so you can raise or lower itelectrically later. battery, you can still raiseor lower the top manually by rotating the valve in the left sideof the trunk.

2-73 Instrument Panel

2-74 A. Fog Lamp Switch (If Equipped) L. Rear Window Defogger Switch B. Main Lamp Control M. Convertible Top Switch (Automatic) (If Equipped) C. Air Vent N. Traction Control System Switch or Second Gear Start Switch (If Equipped) D. Instrument Cluster E. Horn 0. Cigarette Lighter E Audio System P. Shift Lever G. Glove Box Q. Ashtray (Automatic Transmission) H. Comfort Controls R. Convertible Top Switch (Manual) (If Equipped) I. Cupholder S. Steering Wheel Controls J. Parking Brake Lever T. Remote Hatch Release K. Storage Console Instrument Panel Cluster

Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast you’re going, about how much fuel you have lee and many other things you’ll need to know to drive safely and economically.

2-76 Speedometer and Odometer Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles This part describes the warning lights and gages thatmay per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (kmk). Your be on your vehicle. The pictures will helpyou locate them. odometer showshow far yourvehicle has been driven, in either miles (used in the United States)or kilometers Warning lights and gages can signal that something is (used in Canada). wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to You may wonder what happens ifyour Pontiac needs a your warning lights and gages could also save you or new odometer installed.If possible, the new one hasto be others frominjury. set to the same reading the old one had. If it can’t be, then it’s set at zero, but a label onthe driver’s door must show Warning lights come on when theremay be or is a the old reading and when the new one was installed. problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.As you will see in the details on the nextfew pages, some warning Trip Odometer lights come on briefly when youstart the engine just to let The trip odometer cantell you how far yourvehicle has you know they’re working. If you are familiar with this been driven since you last setthe trip odometer to zero. section, you should not be alarmed whenthis happens. To set the trip odometer to zero, press the knob. Gages can indicate when there may be or isa problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and Tachometer warning lights work together to let you know when there’s a problem with your vehicle. The tachometer displays the engine speedin thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm). When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving, orwhen one of the gages shows there may be a problem, check the section that tells you NOTICE: what to do about it. Please followthis manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even Do not operate the engine with the tachometerin dangerous. So please getto know your warning lights the red area,or engine damage may occur. and gages. They’re a big help. 2-77 Safety Belt Reminder Light This light will come on when you startyour engine, When the key is turnedto or START, a chimewill RUN and it will flash for a few come on for about eightseconds to remind people to seconds. Then the light fasten their safety belts. should go out. This means The safety belt light will the systemis ready. also come onand stay on for about 70 seconds. If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light will come on. If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the engine or comes onwhen you are driving, your air bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle serviced right away. The air bag readiness light should flash for a few Air Bag Readiness Light seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument ready to warn you if there is a problem. panel, which shows AIR BAG. The system checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there isan electrical problem. The system check includes the airbag sensors, theair bag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module. For more information on the air bag system, see “Air Bag” in the Index.

2-78 Voltmeter Brake System Warning Light You can read battery Your Pontiac’s hydraulic brake system is divided into voltage on your voltmeter. two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other partcan If it reads less than 11 volts still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you or more than 16 volts while need both parts working well. your engineis running, and If the warning light comes on, therecould be a brake it stays there, you may have problem or the brake fluid level couldbe low. Have your a problem with the brake system inspected right away. electrical charging system. This lightshould come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If Have itchecked right away. Driving with the voltmeter it doesn’t come on then, reading in a warning zone coulddrain your battery. have it fixed so it will be If you idle your engine fora while, the voltmeter BRAKE ready to warn you if there’s reading might move into theyellow zone. If the reading a problem. stays in the yellow zone whileyou are driving, you may have a problem with the electrical charging system. Have it checked. While the voltmeter reads in the yellow zone, your battery may not be able to power certain electrical accessories, like ABS. (If this happens, your If the light comes on while you are driving,pull off the ABS INOP light will come on. See “Anti-Lock Brake road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is System Warning Light” in thispart.) harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor. If you must drive a short distance with the voltmeter It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, or if the reading in a warning zone, turn off all your accessories, anti-lock brake system warning light is flashing, have including your air conditioning and audio system. the vehicle towed for service. (See “Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light” and “Towing YourVehicle” in Anti-Lock 1- System Warning Eight the Index.) With the anti-lockbrake system, this light will come on when you start your engine and it will stay ABS on for three seconds. Your braKe s cem may not be working properly That’s normal. if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving INOP

~ with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on or if the ~ anti-lock brake system warning lightis flashing ! after you’ve pulle’dof€ the road and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for service. If the light flashes when you’re driving, you don’thave anti-lock brakes and there could be a problem with your regular brakes. Pull off the road and stop carefully. You When the ignition is on* thebrake system warning light may notice that the pedal is harder to push. or, the pedal on when YOu set Your Parking brake*The may go closer to the floor, It may take longer to stop, light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release Have the vehicle towed for service. (See “Towing Your fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully Vehicle”in the Index.) released, it means you have a brake problem.

2-80 Traction Control System Warning Light (If Equipped)

I This warning light should Your regular brakesystem may not be working come on briefly as you start properly if the anti-lock brake system warning the engine.If the.warning light is flashing. Driving with the anti-lock light doesn’t come on then, brake system warning light flashing can lead to TCS have it fixed so it will be an accident. After you’ve pulled off the road OFF ready to warn you if there’s and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed a problem. for service.

If the anti-lock brake systemwarning light stays on longer than normal afteryou’ve started your engine, turn If it stays on, or comes on when you’re driving, there the ignition off. Or, if the light comes on and stays on may be a problem with your traction control systemand when you’re driving, stop as soon as possible and turn your vehicle may need service. When thiswarning light the ignition off. Then start the engine again toreset the is on, the systemwill not limit wheel spin. Adjust your system. If the light still stayson, or comes on again driving accordingly. while you’re driving, your Pontiacneeds service. If the light is onbut not flashing and the regular brake system If your brakes begin to overheat, the brake portion of the warning light isn’t on, you still havebrakes, but you traction control system will shut down, butthe throttle don’t have anti-lock brakes. and enginespark control will continueto work. The warning light will not come onwhen this happens. The anti-lock brake system warning light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn’t come onthen, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. The traction control system warning light may come on Low Traction Light for thefollowing reasons: When your anti-locksystem If you turn the system off by pressing the switch is adjusting brake pressure located at the frontof the console thewarning light to help avoid a braking skid, will come on and stay on and the light on the switch this light will come on. will go out. To turn the system back on, press the switch again. The warning light should go off. LOW (See “Traction Control System” in the Index TRAC for moreinformation.) If the temperature of the throttle control b’eginsto rise, the system will turn off and the warning light will come on until the system cools down. The system does this to prevent damage from If you have the traction control system, this lightwill overheating. also come on when the system is limiting wheel spin. If the traction control system warning light comes on Slippery road conditions may exist if thelow traction and stays on for an extended period of time when the light comes on,so adjust your drivingaccordingly. The system is turned on, your vehicle needs service. light will stay on for a few seconds after theanti-lock system stops a’djustingbrake pressureor the traction control system stops limiting wheel spin. The low traction light also comes on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be thereto tell you when the anti-lock brake system or traction control system is active.

2-82 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage Low Coolant Light (VS Engine) This gage showsthe engine This warning lightshould coolant temperature. If the come on while you are gage pointer moves into the starting your engine. If the red area, your engine is too light doesn’t come on, have hot! It means that your it repaired. engine coolanthas overheated.

If you have been operating your vehicle under normal Your Firebird is equipped with a LOW COOLANT driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop indicator which is designed to detectwhen the coolant your vehicle and turn off the engineas soon as possible. level drops below set limits. If the low coolant level In “Problems on the Road,” this manual shows what to sensor (on the radiator) drops while the engine is do. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index. running, the LOW COOLANT indicator will light and remain lit until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. Check coolant level and add coolant as needed. The LOW COOLANT light might stay on after filling the radiator. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then restart the engine toverify that the LOW COOLANT light goesout. See “Engine Coolant” in the Index.

2-83 This system is called OBD I1 (On-Board NOTICE: Diagnostics-Second Generation) andis intended to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life Driving withthe LOW COOLANT light on could of the vehicle, helping to producea cleaner cause your Pontiac to overheat. See 66Engine environment. (In Canada, OBD 11 is replaced by Enhanced Diagnostics.) The SERVICE ENGINE SOON Overheating” in the Index. Pontlac could Your light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and be damaged and it wou1dn”t be coveredby service is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated your warranty. by the system before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed to assist your service technician Malfunction Indicator Lamp in correctly diagnosing any malfunction. (Service EngineSoon Light) NOTICE:

If you keep driving your vehicle with this light SERVICE on, after a while, your emission controls may not ENGINE work as well, your fuel economy may not be as SOON good and your engine may not run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs thatmay not be covered by your warranty,

Your Pontiac is equipped with a computer which monitors operation of the fuel. ignition and emission control systems. 2-84 This light should come on, as a check to show you it is If the Light Is Flashing working, when the ignition is on and the engineis not The following may prevent more serious damage to running. If the light doesn’t come on, have itrepaired. your vehicle: This light will also come onduring a malfunction in one of two ways: 0 Reducing vehicle speed. 0 Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been 0 Avoiding hard accelerations. detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and 0 Avoiding steep uphill grades. may damage the emission control system on your vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis 0 If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of and service is required. cargo being hauled as soonas it ispossible. 0 Light On Steady-- An emission control system If the light stopsflashing and remains on steady, see “If malfunction has been detected on your vehicle. the Light Is On Steady” following. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and If the light continues to flash,when it is safe to do so, service may be required. stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light remainson steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light isstill flashing, follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your dealer or qualified service center for service.

2-85 If the Light Is On Steady Have you recently changed brands of fuel? You may be able to correctthe emission system If so, be sure to fuel yourvehicle with quality fuel (see malfunction by considering the following: “Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may Did you recently put fuelinto your vehicle? notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling whenyou If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on the cap, The diagnostic system candetermine if the fuel acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or conditions may go away once the engine iswarmed up.) missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the This will be detected by the system and cause thelight atmosphere. A few driving tripswith the cap properly to turn on. installed should turn the light off. If you experience one or more of these conditions, Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water? change the fuel brand you use. It will requireat least one If so, your electrical system may be wet. Thecondition full tank of the proper fuel toturn the light off. will usually be correctedwhen the electrical system If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off, have your dealer orqualified service center check the Are you low on fuel? vehicle. Your dealer hasthe proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical As your engine starts to run out of fuel, your engine may problems that may have developed. not run as efficiently as designed since small amountsof air are sucked into the fuel line causing a misfire. The system can detect this. Adding fuel should correct this condition. Make sure to install the fuel cap properly. It will take a few driving trips to turn the light off.

2-86 Engine Oil Pressure Gage the engine is low on oil, or that you might have some other oil problem. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.

\ / 0 Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If 120 you do, your engine can become so hot that it catches fire. You or others could be burned. \‘O Check your oil as soon as possible and have your ii vehicle serviced. V6 Engine VS Engine

One of these gagesmay tell you there could be a I NOTICE: problem with your engineoil pressure. The engine oil pressure gageshows the engine oil Damage to your engine from neglected oil pressure in psi (pounds per squareinch) in the United problems can be costlyand is not covered by States, or kPa(kilopascals) in Canada, when the engine your warranty. is running. Oil pressure shouldbe 20 to 80 psi (140 to 550 kPa). On the 3800 engine the oil pressure should be between 20 and 120 psi (140 to 827 kPa). It may vary with engine speed, outside temperature and oil viscosity, but readings abovethe red area show the normal operating range. Readings in the red area tell you that

2-87 Low Oil Light If the light stays on after starting your engine, your engine oil level may be too low. You may need to add Your vehicle is equipped oil. See “Engine Oil” in the Index. with an oil levelmonitoring system. When you start your engine, the warning NOTICE: light will come on briefly. If LOW the light doesn’t come on, The oil level monitoring system only checks the OIL have it repaired. oil level whenyou are startingyour engine. It does not keep monitoring the level onceyour engine is running. Also, theoil level check only works when the enginehas been turnedoff long enough for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.

2-88 Check Gages Light When the gage pointer first indicates EMPTY (E) you need to get more right away. This warning light will Here are four concerns some owners haveabout had the come on briefly when YOU fuel gage. All these situations are normaland do not are starting the engine. If indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage. the light comes on and CHECK stays on while you are 0 At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before the driving, check your gages gage reads FULL (F). GAGES to seeif they are in the 0 It takes more (or less) gas to fillup than the gage warning areas. reads. For example, the gagereads 1/2 full, but it took more (or less) than half of the tank's capacity to fill it. 0 The gage moves a little when you turn, stop or Fuel Gage speed up. Your fuel gage shows about 0 When you turn the engineoff, the gage doesn't go how much fuel isin your back to EMPTY (E). Itank. The gage works only when the ignition switch is in the RUN position. 2-90 Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems

In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systemsoffered with your Pontiac. Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.

3-2 Comfort Controls 3-10 AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape Player 3-3 Air Conditioning and Equalizer 3-3 Cooling 3- 14 AM-FM Stereo with CompactDisc Player 3-4 Heating and Equalizer 3-4 Bi-Level Heating 3-16 Trunk Mounted CD Changer 3-4 Ventilation 3-19 Theft-Deterrent Feature 3-4 Defogging and Defrosting 3-2 1 Steering Wheel Controls 3-5 Rear Window Defogger 3-22 Understanding Radio Reception 3-5 Ventilation System 3-22 Tips About Your Audio System 3-6 Audio Systems 3-23 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player 3-6 Setting the Clock for All Systems 3-23 Care of Your Compact Discs 3-7 AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player 3-24 Power Antenna Mast Care

3-1 Comfort Controls Temperature Control Knob Turn the knob to change the temperature of the air I flowing from the heating system, Turn it toward the I, ,I red or clockwise for warmer air and toward the blueor counterclockwise for cooler air. The temperature of the air cannot be less than the temperatureof the outsideair.

Air ContL - - ____ - .b OFF: The system is off. I 2 VENT Air flows through the upper air vents. 12BI-LEVEL: Air is directed through the upper air vents and the heater ducts. With this system, you can control theheating and ventilation in your Pontiac. If you have the air \r/ HEATER: This setting directs most of the air conditioning option, you can also control cooling. through the heater ducts and someof the air throughthe windshield defroster vents. Your vehicle also has the flow-through ventilation system described later inthis section. '9 BLEND: Air is'directed through the windshield defroster vents and the heater ducts. Fan Control Knob. 9DEFROS'G: This setting directs most of the air a FAN: Turn this knob to select the forceof air through the windshield defroster ventsand some of the you want. air through the heaterducts.

3-2 Air Conditioning (If Equipped) A/C: Use for normal cooling on hot days.This setting cools outside air and c‘kts it through the upper airvents.

The i-111- conditioner cumpressor operatesin MAX, AIC, BI-LEVEL, BLEND and DEFROST when the outside temperature is above freezing.When the air conditioner is on, you may sometimes notice slight changes in your vehicle’s engine speed and power. This is normal because the system is designed to cyclethe compressor on and off to keep the desired cooling and help I fuel economy. Cooling The airconditioner works best if you keep your The air conditioning system uses the same controls as windows closed. On very hot days, open the windows the heating system, except that the air controlknob has just long enough for the hot air to escape. two extra settings, described below. 1. Turn the air control knob to A/C for normal cooling. MAX: Provides maximumcooling or quickcool-down For faster cooling, move theknob to MAX. on very hot days. Thissetting recirculates most of the air inside your vehicle. If it is used for long periods of time, 2. Turn the temperature control knob to a the air may become dry. This setting directs air through comfortable setting. the upper air vents, 3. Move the fan control knob to the desired speed. Heating 1, Turn the air control knob to BI-LEVEL. The heater works best if you keep your windows closed 2. Turn the temperamre control knob to a while using it. comfortable setting. 1. Turn the air control knob to HEATER. 3. Turn the fan control knob to the desired speed. 2. Turn the fan control knobto the desired speed. Ventilation 3. Turn the temperature control knobto a For mild outside temperatures when little heating or comfortable setting. cooling is needed, you can still direct outside air through During initial start-up only, if your vehicleis equipped your vehicle. with an optional engine coolanth'eater, you can use it in I, Turn the air control knobto VENT. cold weather (around +20°F/-8"C or lower) to improve heater performance on start up, Because an engine 2. Turn the temperature control knob to a coolant heater warms the enginecoolant, your vehicle's co'mfortable setting. heating system can moreefficiently pro'videheat for the 3. Turn the fan control knobto the desired speed. passenger area of your vehicle. See "Engine Coolant Heater" in the Index. Defogging and Defrosting Bi-Level Heating 1. 'Turn the air cantrol knobto DEFROST. You may want to use bi-level heating on cool, but sunny 2. Turn the temperature control knobto the days. This setting directs cool airtoward your body and desired setting. warmer air toward your feet. 3. Turn the fan control knobto the desired speed.

3-4 Rear Window Defogger(If Equipped) Ventilation System The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window. Press the switch to turn on the defogger. An indicator light will come on to remind you that the defogger is on.

I The defogger will turn off automatically after about 10 minutes of use. If you turn it on again, the defogger will operate for about fiveminutes only. You can also turn the defogger off by pressing the switch again. Do not attach anything like atemporary vehicle license Your Pontiac’s flow-through ventilation system supplies or a decal across the defogger grid on the rear window. outside air into the vehicle when it is moving. Outside air will also enter the vehicle when the blower fan NOTICE: is running.

Don’t use a razor bladeor something else sharp on the inside of the rear window. If you do, you could cutor damage the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be coveredby your warranty.

3-5 Ventilation Tips Audio Systems a Keep thehood and front air inlet freeof ice, snow or Your Delco@ audiosystem has been designed to operate any other obstruction (such as leaves). The heater easily and give yearsof listening pleasure. You will get and defroster will work far better, reducing the the most enjoyment outof it if you acquaint yourself chance of fogging the inside of your windows. with it first. Find outwhat your Delco system cando When you enter a vehicle in coldweather, turn the and how to operate all its controls,to be sure you’re fan controlknob to the right for a few moments getting the most out o’f the advanced ‘engineering that before driving off. This helps clear the intakeducts went into it. of snow and moisture,and reduces the chanceof If you have power door locks, your vehicle hasa feature fogging the inside of your windows. called Retained Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, Keep the air path under the rront sems clear of you can play your audio system even after the ignition is objects. This helps air to circulatethroughout off. See “Retained Accessory Power” in the Index. your vehicle. Setting the Clock for All Systems Press andhold HR until the correct hour appears. Press and hold MIN untilthe correct minute appears. There will be a two-second delay before the clockgoes into time-set mode, and the colon on the display will blink while in this mode.

3-6 AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape Player TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to (If Equipped) choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored position when you’re not using it. SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there. PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just: 1. Turn the radio on. 2. Press AM-FM to select the band. 3. Tune in the desired station. 4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until Playing the Radio SET appears on the display. Whenever you press that numbered button, the stationyou set will return. VOL: Push this knob toturn the system on and off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it 5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. counterclockwise to decreasevolume. Setting the Tone RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by BASS: Slide thelever to the right or left to increase or pressing this knob. When theradio is playing, press this decrease bass. knob to recall the station frequency. TREBLE: Slide the lever to the right or left to increase Finding a Station or decrease treble,If a station is weak or noisy, you may AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1 want to decrease the treble. and FM2. The display shows your selection. 3-7 Adjusting the Speakers If E and a number appear on the radio display, the tape BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn this won’t play because of an error. knob to move the soundto the left or right speakers. 0 E10: The tape is tight and the player can’t turn the The middle position balances the sound between tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the speakers. the open end down and try to turn the right hub counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tapeover FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn this and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, yourtape knob to move the soundto the front or rear speakers. may be damaged and should not be used in the The middle position balances the sound between player. Try a new tape to make sureyour player is the speakers. working properly. Push these knobsback into their stored positions when Ell: The tape is broken. Try a new tape. you’re not using them. If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be Playing a CassetteTape corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are displays an error number, write it down and provide it to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than your dealer when reporting the problem. that are so thin they may not work well in this player. PREV (I): Press this button or the SEEK down arrow to While the tape is playing, use the VOL, FADE, BAL, search for the previous selection on thetape. Your tape BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the radio. must have at least three seconds of silence between each The display will show an arrow to show which side of selection for PREV or SEEK to work. The tape direction the tape is playing. When thedown indicator arrow is arrow blinks during PREV or SEEK operation. Press lit, selections listed on the bottom side of the cassette are PREV or the SEEK down arrow to stop searching.The playing, When the up arrow is lit, selections listed on the sound will mute during PREV or SEEK operation. top side of the cassette are playing. The tape player automatically begins playing the other side when it reaches the end of the tape. NEXT (2): Press this button or the SEEK up arrow to FWD (6): Press this button to advance quickly to search for the next selection on the tape. If you hold the another part of the tape. Press the button again to return button, the player will continue moving forward through to playing speed. The radio will play the last-selected the tape. Your tape must have at least three seconds of station while the tape advances. You may select stations silence between each selection for NEXT or SEEK to during FWD operation by using SEEK or TUNE. work. The tape direction arrow blinks during NEXT or AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio when a tape SEEK operation. Press NEXT or the SEEK up arrow to is in the player. stop searching. The sound will mute during NEXT or SEEK operation. TAPEPLAY Press this button to change to the tape function when the radio is on. Thetape symbol with an PROG (3): Press this button to play the other side arrow will appear onthe display when the tape is active. of the tape. To return to playing the radio, press the AM-FM button. 130 (4): Press this button to reduce background noise. EJECT Press this button to remove thetape. The radio Note that the double-D symbol will appear on the display. will play. EJECT may be activated with either the Dolby@Noise Reduction is manufactured under a ignition or radio off. Cassettes may be loaded with the license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. radio and ignition off if this button is pressed first. If Dolby and the double-D symbol aretrademarks of you leave a cassette tape in the player while listening to Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. the radio, it may become warm. REV (5): Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly. CLN: If this message appears on the display, the Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio will cassette tapeplayer needs to be cleaned. It will still play play the last-selected station while the tape reverses. tapes, but you should clean it assoon as possible to You may select stations during REV operation by using prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of SEEK or TUNE. Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index.After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to show the indicator was reset.

3-9 CD Adapter Kits AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player It is possible to use CD a adapter kitwith your cassette and Equalizer (I€Equipped) tape player after activating thebypass feature on your tape player. To activate the bypass feature, the ignitionmust be on. Turn your radio off. Press TAPERLAY andhold for three seconds. After three seconds, the tape symbol in the display will flash for two seconds indicating the feature is active. Turn the radioon and insert the adapter. This override featurewill remain active until EJECT is pressed.

Included with the AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and Equalizer, are 10 high performance speakers and an 8 channel, 500 watt amplifier. See your dealer for details.

3-10 Playing the Radio 4. Press and hold oneof the six numberedbuttons until SET appears on the display. Wheneveryou press that VOL: Push this knob to turn the system andon off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise.Turn it numbered button, the stationyou set willreturn. counterclockwise to decrease volume. 5. Repeat the stepsfor each pushbutton. RECALL: Display the timewith the ignitionoff by Setting the Tone pressing this knob. When the radio is playing, pressthis knob torecall the station frequency. EQUALIZER: Aseven band equalizer ispart of your audio system. Slide the levers toup boost or down to Finding a Station reduce frequency range. AM-FM: Press this buttonto switch between AM, FM1 Adjusting the Speakers and FM2. The display showsyour selection. BAL: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn it to TUNE: Press this knob lightlyso it extends.Turn it to move the soundto the leftor right speakers. The middle choose radio stations.Push the knob back into its stored position balancesthe sound between the speakers. position when you’re not usingit. FADE: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn it to SEEK: Press the up or downarrow to go to the next move the sound to the front or rear speakers. middle The higher or lower station and stay there. position balances the sound betweenthe speakers. PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let Push these knobs back into their stored positionswhen you return to your favorite stations.You can setup to you’re not using them. 18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just: 1. Turn the radio on. Playing a Cassette Tape 2. Press AM-FM to select the band. Your tape player is built workto best with tapes that are 30 to 45 minutes long on e,achside. Tapes longer than 3. Tune in the desired station. that are so thin they may not work well in thisplay’er.

3-11 While the tape is playing, use the VOL, FADE and BAL PREY (1): Press this button or the SEEK down arrowto controls just as you do forthe radio. The display will search for the previous selection on the tape. Your tape show an arrow to show which side of the tape is playing. must have at least three secondsof silence between ah When the down indicator arrow is lit, selections listed selection for PREV or SEEK to work. The tape direction on the bottom side of the cassette areplaying. When the arrow blinks during PREV or SEEK operation. Press up arrow is lit, selections listed on the top side of the PREV or the SEEK down arrow to stop searching. The cassette are playing. The tape player automatically sound will mute during PREV or SEEK operation. begins playing the other side when it reaches the end of NEXT (2): Press this button or the SEEK up arrow to the tape. search for the next selection on the tape. If you hold the If E and a number appear on theradio display, the tape button, the player will continue moving forward through won’t play because of an error. the tape. Your tape must have at least three secondsof E10: The tape is tight and the player can’t turn the silence between each selectionfor NEXT or’SEEKto tape hubs. Remove the tape. Holdthe tape with work. The tape direction arrow blinks during NEXT or SEEK operation. Press NEXT or the SEEK up arrow to the open end down and try to turn the right hub counterclockwise with a pencil, Turn the tape over stop searching. The sound will mute during NEXT or and repeat. If the hubs donot turn easily, your tape SEEK operation. may be damaged and should not be used in the PROG (3): Press this button to play the other side player. Try a new tape to make sure your player is of the tape. working properly. on (4): Press this button to reduce background noise. Ell: The tape is broken. Try a new tape. Note that the double-D symbol will appearon the display, If any error occursrepeatedly or if an error can’t be Dolby00 Noise Reduction is manufactured under a corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio license fromDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. displays an error nuniber, write it down and provide it to Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of your dealer when reporting the problem. Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

3-12 REV (5): Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly. CLN: If this message appears onthe display, the Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio will cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play play the last-selected station while the tape reverses. tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to You may select stations during REV operation by using prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of SEEK or TUNE. Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean FWD (6): Press this button to advance quickly to the player, press and hold EJECT for fiveseconds to another part of the tape. Pressthe button again to return reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to to playing speed. The radiowill play the last-selected show the indicator was reset. station while the tape advances. You may select stations CD Adapter Kits during FWD operation by using SEEK or TUNE. It is possible to use a CD adapter kitwith your cassette AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio when a tape tape player after activating the bypass feature on your is in the player. tape player. TAPE/PLAY Press this button to change to the tape To activate the bypass feature, the ignition must be on. function when the radio is on. The tape symbol with an Turn your radio off. Press TAPE/PLAY and hold for arrow will appear on the display when the tape is active. three seconds. After three seconds, the tape symbol in To return to playing the radio,press the AM-FM button. the display will flash for two seconds indicating the EJECT Press this button to remove the tape. The feature is active. Turn the radio onand insert radio will play. EJECT may be activated with either the the adapter. ignition or radio off. Cassettes may be loaded with the This override feature will remain active until EJECT radio off if this button is pressed first. If you leave a is pressed. cassette tape in theplayer while listening to the radio, il may become warm.

3-13 AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player Finding a Station and Equalizer (If Equipped) AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1 and FM2. The display shows your selection. TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn itto choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored position when you’re not usingit. SEEK: Press theup or down arrowto go to the next higher or lower station and stay there, PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return toyour favorite stations.You can setup to 18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just: 1. Turn the radio on. Included withthe AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player 2. Press AM-FM to select the band. and Equalizer, are 10 high performance speakers andan 3. Tune in the desired station. 8 channel, 500 watt amplifier. See your dealer for details. 4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until Playing the Radio SET appears on the display. Wheneveryou press that VOL: Push this knob to turn the system on and off. numbered button, the stationyou set will return. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise.Turn it 5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. counterclockwise to decrease volume. RECALL: Press this button briefly to recall the station being played or to display the clock.If you press the knob when the ignitionis off, the clock willshow for a few seconds. 3-14 Setting the Tone If you’re drivingon a very rough road orif it’s very hot, EQUALIZER: A seven band equalizeris part of your the disc may not play and E (error) anda number may audio system. Slide the leversup to boost or down to appear onthe radio display. If the disc comes out,it reduce frequency range. could be that: 0 The disc is upside down. Adjusting the Speakers e It is dirty, scratched or wet. BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends.Turn it to move the soundto the leftor right speakers. The middle 0 The air is very humid.(If so, wait about an hour and position balancesthe sound between the speakers. try again.) FADE: Press this knob lightlyso it extends.Turn it to If any error occurs repeatedly orif an errorcan’t be move the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middlecorrected, please contact yourdealer. If your radio position balances thesound between the speakers. displays an error number, write it downand provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem. Push these knobs back intotheir stored positions when you’re not usingthem. PREV (1): Press this button or the SEEK down arrow to go to the startof the current trackif more than eight Playing a CompactDisc seconds have played.If you hold the button or press it more than once, the player will continue moving back The integral CD player can play 8 cm “single” through the disc. mini-discs. Full-size compact discs and mini-discs are loaded in the samemanner. NEXT (2): Press this button or theSEEK up arrow to go to the startof the next trackif more than eight Insert a disc partway into the slot, label sideup. The seconds have played.If you hold the button or pressit player will pull it in.If the ignition and the radio areon, more than once, the player will continuemoving the &ksc will begin playing. If you want to insert a disc forward throughthe disc. when the ignition is off, first press EJECT.

3-15 RDM (3): Press this buttonto hear the tracks in random, Trunk Mounted CD Changer (If Equipped) rather than sequential, order. The display will show RDM. Pres,sRDM again to turn off random play. With the optional compactdisc changer, you can play up to 12 discs continuously. Normal size discsmay be REV (5): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse played using the trays supplied in the magazine. within a track. Releaseit to play the passage.You will hear sound at a reduced volume. The displaywill show The small discs(8 cm) canbe played only with specially elapsed time. designed trays. FWD (6): Press and hold this button to quickly advance You must first load the magazine with discs beforeyou within a track.You will hear sound at a reduced volume. can play a compact disc. Eachof the 12 trays holds one The display will show elapsed time. disc. Press the buttonon the back of the magazine and pull gently on one of the trays. Load the trays from RECALL: Press this button to see what track is bottom to top, placing a disc on the tray label side down. currently playing. Press RECALLagain within five If you. load a disc label sideup, the disc will not play seconds tosee how long the track hasbeen playing. and an error will occur, Gentlypush the tray back into When a new track starts toplay, the track numberwill the magazine slot. Repeat this procedurefor loading up also appear. Press RECALL a third time and the timeof to 12 discs in the magazine. day will be displayed. Once you have loaded thediscs in the magazine, slide AM-FM: Press this buttonto play the radio when a disc open the doorof th'e compact disc(CD) changer. Push is playing. The discwill stop but remainin the player. the magazine into the changer in the directionof the CDPLAY: Press this button to change to the disc arrow marked on topof the magazine. Function when the radiois on. Close the doorby sliding it all theway to the left. If the EJECT: Press this button to remove thedis'c or stop the door is left partially open, the changer will not operate disc and switch to the radio. EJECT will work with the and an error willoccur. When the door is closed, the radio off. If you leave a compact discin the player while changer will begin checking for discsin the magazine, listening to the radio,it may become warm. This will continue forup to two minutes depending on the numberof discs loaded. To eject the magazine from theplayer, slide the CD If the error occurred while trying to play a CD in the changer door all the way open. Themagazine will compact disc player or changer, the following conditions automatically eject. Remember tokeep the door closed may have caused the error: whenever possible to keep dirtand dust fromgetting 0 The road is too rough. The disc should play when the inside the changer. road is smoother. All of the CD functions arecontrolled by the radio 0 The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down. buttons except for ejecting the magazine. Whenever a CD magazine with discs is loaded in the changer, the e The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and compact disc symbol will appear on the radio display. If try again. the CD changer is checking the magazine for CDs, the e The CD changerdoor is open. Completely close the compact disc symbol will flash on the display until the door to restorenormal operation. changer is ready to play. When a CD begins playing, CD will appear in the bottom left corner and a disc and track 0 An empty magazine is inserted in the CD changer. number will be displayed. The disc numbers are listed Try the magazine again with a disc loaded on one of on the frontof the magazine. the trays. If any error occursrepeatedly or if an error cannot be Compact Disc Errors corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio If E and a number appear on the display, an error has displays an errornumber, write it down and provide it to occurred and the compact disctemporarily cannot play. your dealer when reporting the problem. The CD changerwill send an error message to the receiver to indicate: E34: CD Changer Door Open

0 E35: CD Changer Cartridge Empty

3-17 Playing a Compact Disc FWD (6): Press and hold this button to quickly advance PREV (1): Press this button to go backto the startof within a track. As the CD advances, elapsed time willbe displayed to help you find the correct passage. the current trackif more than eight secondshave played. Press PREV again to go to the previoustrack on RECALL: Press this button to see what track is the disc. currently playing. PressRECALL again within five seconds to see how long the track has been playing.EL NEXT Press this button to advanceto the next track (2): TM will appear on the displaywhen in elapsed time on the disc. mode. When a new track startsto play, the track number PROG (3): Press this button to select the next disc in will also appear. Press RECALL a third time and the the magazine. If a CD cannot be played, itsnumber time of day will be displayed. will be skippedwhen selecting discswhile using the SEEK: Press the SEEK down arrow while playing aCD PROG button. to go back to the startof the current track if more than RANDOM (4): Press this buttonto enter the random eight seconds have played.If you press it again, the play mode. RDM will appear on the display. Whilein changer willgo to previous tracks. Press theSEEK up this mode, the tracks onthe discs will be played in arrow and it will go to the next higher trackon the disc. random order. If you press PRQG or SEEK while in the TAPERLAY: Press this button toplay a CD if you random mode, discsand tracks will be scanned have a magazine loadedin the changer and the radio is randomly. Press thisbutton again to turnoff the random playing. To return to the radio while aCD is playing, feature and return to normal operation. press AM-FM. You can also press this buttonto switch REV (5): Press and hold this buttonto quickly reverse between a cassette tape andCD, if both are loaded. within a track. As the CD reverses, elapsed timewill be displayed to help you find the correctpassage.

3-18 Theft-Deterrent Feature 1. Write down any threeor four-digit numberfrom 000 to 1999 and keepit in a safe place separate from THEFTLOCK" is designed to discourage theftof your the vehicle. radio. Itworks by using a secret code to disable all radio functions whenever battery power is removed. 2. Turn the ignition toACCESSORY or RUN. The THEFTLOCK feature for the radiomay be used or 3. Turn the radio off. ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the 4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down radio isnot protected by the feature.If THEFTLOCK until --- shows on thedisplay. Next you will use the is activated, yourradio will not operateif stolen. secret code number whichyou have written down. When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radiowill display 5. Press MIN and 000 will appearon the display. LOC to indicate a locked condition anytimebattery power is removed.If your battery loses power for any 6. Press MIN again to make the lasttwo digits agree reason, you must unlock the radiowith the secret code with your code. before itwill operate. 7. Press HR to make the first oneor two digits agree with your code. Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature 8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmedthat the The instructionswhich follow explain howto enter your code matches the secret codeyou have written down. secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system.It is The display willshow REP to letyou know that you recommended thatyou read through all nine steps need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your before starting the procedure. secret code. NOTE: If you allow more than15 seconds to elapse 9. Press AM-FM andthis time the display will show between any steps, the radio automatically reverts to SEC to let you know that your radio is secure. time and you must start the procedure over at Step4. Note thatwith the ignitionoff, the THEFTLOCK indicator will flash, indicating a securedradio.

3-19 Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature Aftera 1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN. Power Loss 2. Turn the radio off. Enter your secret code as follows; pause no morethan 3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down 15 seconds between steps: until SEC shows on the display. 1. LOC appears when the ignition is on. 4. Press MIN and 000 will appear on thedisplay. 2. Press MIN and 000 will appearcan the display. 5. Press MIN again to make the lasttwo digits agree 3. Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree with your code. with your code. 6. Press HR to make the first oneor two digits agree 4, Press HR to make thefirst one ortwo digits agree with your code. with your code. 7. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the 5. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you havewritten down. code matches the secret codeyou have written down. The display will show ---,indicating that the radiois The displaywill show SEC, indicating the radio is no longer secured. now operable and secure. If the code enteredis incorrect, SEC will appear on the If you enter the wrong code eight times,INOP will appear display. The ra’diowill remain secured until the correct on the display. You willhave to wait an hour with the code is entered. ignition on before you can try again. Whenyou try again, When battery power is removed and later appliedto a you will only have three more chances (eight tries per secured radio, the radio won’t turn on and LOC will chance) to enter the correct code before INOPappears. appear on the display. If you lose or forget your code,contact your dealer. To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss” earlier in this section. Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than 15 seconds between steps: Steering Wheel Controls(If Equipped) MUTE: Press this button t'o silence the system. Press it again to turn on the sound. SEEK: Press the up arrow to tune to thenext radio station and the down arrow to tune to the previous radio station. If a cassette tapeor compact disc is playing,the player will advance with the up arrow and rewind with the down arrow. PRESET Press this button to hear the radio stations that are set on yourpushbuttons. Pressing this button while playing a tape will cause the tape to change sides. If it is pressed while playing a CD, the CD random feature canbe turned off and on.If this button is pressed If your vehicle has this feature, you can control certain when using the optional 12-disc changer, the changer radio and compact disc functions using the buttons on will select the next ,disc available. your steering wheel. AM-FM: Press thisbutton to select AM, FM1 or FM2. VOLUME: Press the up or down arrow to increase or If a cassette tapeor compact disc isplaying, the tape or decrease volume. disc will stop playing and the radio willplay. If this button is pressed with a CD in the CD changer, the disc PLAY: Press this button to play a cassette tape or will go to the next selection. compact disc when the radio isplaying.

3-21 Understanding Radio Reception To help avoid hearingloss or damage: Adjust the volume controlto the lowest setting. FMSterw Increase volumk slowly until you hear comfortably FM stereo will give you thebest sound. But FM signals an’dclearly. will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the sound to come andgo. NOTICE: AM Before you add any soundequipment to your The range for mostAM stations is greater than forFM, vehicle like a tape player, CB radio, mobile especially at night. The longerrange, however, can -- telephone or two-way radio be sure you can add cause stations to interfere witheach other. AM can pick -- up noise from things like stormsand power lines. Try what you want. If you can, it’s very important to reducing the treble to reduce thisnoise if you ever get it. do it properly. Added soundequipment may interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s Tips About Your Audio System engine, Delco radio or other systems, and even Hearing damage fromloud noise is almost undetectable damage them. Your vehicle’s sys$ems may until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher interfere with the operation of sound equipment volumes of sound. Sound that seemsnormal can be loud that has been added improperly. and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by So, before adding sound equipment, check with adjusting the volume control on yourradio to a safe your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules sound level before your hearing adapts to it. covering mobileradio andtelephone units.

3-22 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause the tape head. This type of cleaning cassettewill not reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged eject and,it may not clean as thoroughly as the mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their scrubbing type cleaner. cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate After you clean the player, press and hoId EJECT for properly or may cause failureof the tape player. five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to show the indicator was reset. Your tape player should be cleanedregularly after every 50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate Cassettes are subject to wearand the sound quality that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appears tape is in good condition before you have your tape on the display, your cassette tapeplayer needs to be player serviced. cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and Care of Your Compact Discs player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a Handle discs carefully. Store them intheir original cases known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape or other protectivecases and away from direct sunlight player at fault. If this other cassettehas no improvement and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a in sound quality, clean the tape player. clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergentsolution and Cleaning may be done with a scrubbing action, clean it,wiping from the center to the edge. non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub Be sure never to touch the signal surfacewhen handling the tape headas the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. It discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the is normalfor the cassetteto eject while cleaning. Insert edge of the hole and the outer edge. the cassetteat least three times to ensure thorough cleaning. A scrubbing action cleaning cassette is available through your Pontiac dealership.

3-23 Power Antenna Mast Care NOTICE: Your power antenna will lookits best and work well if it’s cleaned from time to time. To clean the antenna mast: Before entering an automatic car wash, turn off your radio to make the power antenna go down, 1. Turn on the ignition and radio to raisethe antenna. This will prevent the mast from possibly getting 2. Dampen a clean cloth with mineral spiritsor damaged, If the antenna does not go down when equivalent solvent. you turn the radio off, it may be damaged or 3. Wipe the cloth over the mast sections, removing need to be cleaned. In either case, lower the any dirt. antenna by hand by carefully pressing the antenna down. 4. Wipe dry with a clean cloth. 5. Make the antenna go up and downby turning the radio or ignition off and on. If the mast portionof your antenna is damaged, you can easily replaceit. See your dealer fora replacement kit 6. Repeat if necessary. and follow the instructions in the kit.

NOTICE:

Don’t lubricate the power antenna. Lubrication could damage it. -

3-24 NOTES

3-25 b% NOTES

3-26 Section 4 Your Driving and the Road

Here you’ll find information about driving on different kindsof roads and in varying weather conditions.We’ve also included many other useful tips on driving.

4-2 Defensive Driving 4- 17 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads 4-2 Drunken Driving 4-20 CityDriving 4-5 Control of a Vehicle 4-2 1 FreewayDriving 4-6 Braking 4-22 BeforeLeaving on a Long Trip 4-10 Steering 4-23 Hilland Mountain Roads 4-12 Off-Road Recovery 4-25 WinterDriving 4-13 Passing 4-30 Loading Your Vehicle 4- 14 Loss of Control 4-32 Towing a Trailer 4-15 Driving at Night

4-1 Defensive Driving Assume that pedestrians or other drivers aregoing to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do. Be ready €or their mistakes. Rear-end collisionsare about the most preventable of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following distance. It’s the best defensive driving maneuver,in both city and rural driving.You never know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brakeor turn suddenly. Drunken Driving Death and injury associated withdnnking and dnving is a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to the highway death toll, claiming thousandsof victims every year. Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle: Judgment 0 MUSGU~WCoordination Vision The best advice anyone can give about drivingis: Drive defensively. Attentiveness. Please start with a very important safety device in your Police records show that almost half of all motor Pontiac: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.) vehiclle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases, these deaths are the resultof someone who was drinking Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.” and driving. In recent years, some 17,000 annual motor On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use “always expect the unexpected.” of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured. Many adults -- by some estimates,nearly half the adult same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce(120 ml) glasses population -- choose never to drink alcohol, so they of wine or threemixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces never drive afterdrinking. For persons under 2 1, it’s (45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka. against the law in every U.S. state to drinkalcohol. There aregood medical, psychological and developmental reasons for these laws. The obvious way to solve this highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcoholand then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much” if the driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many might think. Although it depends on each person and situation, here is some general information on the problem. The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone who is drinking depends upon fourthings:

0 The amount of alcohol consumed

0 The drinker’s body weight The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking

0 The length of time it has taken the drinker to It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. Forexample, if consume the alcohol. the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces According to theAmerican Medical Association, a or 90 ml of liquor each) within anhour, the person’s 180-lb.(82 kg) person who drinksthree 12-ounce BAC would be close to0.12 percent. A person who (355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a consumes foodjust before or during drinking will have a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the somewhat lower BAC level.

4-3 There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have increases sharply for drivers who havea BAC of a lower relativepercentage of body water than men. 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of Si= akobol is carried in body water, this means that a 0.06 percent has doubled hisor her chanceof having a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chanceof man of her same body weight when each has the same this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a number of drinks. level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater! The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC The body takes about an hour to riditself of the alcohol of 0.10 percent. In a growing number of U.S. states, and in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold throughout Canada, the limitis 0.08 percent. Ira some showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the other countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limit forall right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to commercial drivers inthe United States is 0.04 percent, take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street? A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able The B’ACwill be over 0.10 percent after three to six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it to react quickly enough to avoid the collision. depends on how much alcoholis in the drinks, and how There’s something else about drinkingand driving that quickly the person drinks them. many people don’t know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows that thedriving skills worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cordor of many people areimpaire’d at a BAC approaching heart. This means that when anyone who has been 0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All drinking -- drives or pas,senger== is in a crash, that drivers are impaired at BAClevels above0.05 percent. person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision is higher than if the person had not b’eendrinking.

4-4 Drinking and then drivingis very dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions, attentivenessand judgment can be affectedby even a small amount of alcohol. You can have a serious -- or even fatal -- collision if you drive afterdrinking. Please don’t drink and drive or ridewith a driver who has been drinking. Ride homein a cab; or if you’re with a group, designatea driver who will not drink.

Control of a Vehicle You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s the accelerator. All three systems haveto do their work easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires at the places where the tiresmeet the road. and road can provide. That means you can losecontrol of your vehicle. Braking Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy Brakmg action involves perception time and braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic.This is a reaction time. mistake. Your brakes may not have time to coolbetween First, you have to decideto push on thebrake pedal, hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much fasterif you That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the foot and do it. That’s reaction time. traffic and allow realistic following distances,you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means Average reaction time is about 314 of a second. But better braking and longer brakelife. that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with If your engine everstops while you’re driving, brake another. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). you will use it when you brake. Once the powerassist is That could be a lot of distance in anemergency, so used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal keeping enough space between your vehicle and others will be harder to push. is important, And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake forceapplied.

4-6 Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS) Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid. When you start your engine, orwhen you begin to drive away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is going on, and you may even notice that your brake pedal moves a little. This isnormal. If there’s a problem with the anti-lock brake system, this warning light will stay on or flash. See “Anti-Lock ABS Brake System Warning INOP Light” in theIndex. Here’s how anti-lock works.Let’s say the road is wet. You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumpsout in front of you. You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens with ABS. A computer senses that wheels are slowingdown. If one of the wheels is about to st,oprolling, the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at the rear wheels.

4-7 The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure faster stopping distance.If you get tooclose to the vehiclein than any driver could. The computer is programmed to front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes make the most of available tire and road conditions. if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.Always leave enough roomup ahead to stop, even thoughyou have anti-lock brakes. Using Anti-Lock Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down and let anti-lock work for you.You may feel the system working, oryou may notice some noise, but this is normal. When your anti-lock systemis adjusting brake pressure to helpavoid a braking skid, this lightwill come on. See “Low Traction Light” in the Index. Traction Control System (Option: LTI V8 Engine) Your vehicle may have a traction control system that limits wheel spin. Thisis especially useful in slippery road conditions. The system operatesonly if it senses You can steeraround the obstacle while braking hard. that one or both of the rear wheelsare spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this happens,the As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on system works the rear brakes and reduces engine power wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly. (by closing the throttle and managing engine spark) Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the timeyou need to limit wheel spin. to get your footup to the brake pedalor always decrease This light will come on When the system is on, when your traction control this warning light will system is limitingwheel come onto let you how if spin. See “Low Traction there’s a problem with your LOW Light” in the Index. You TCS traction control.system. may feel orhear the system OFF See “Traction Control TRAC working, but this is normal. System Warning Light” in the Index.

The traction control system may operate on dry roads When this warning light is on, the system will not limit under some conditions, and you may notice a reduction wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. in acceleration when thishappens. This is normal and The traction control systemautomatically comes on doesn’t mean there’s a problem with your vehicle. whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin, Examples of these conditions include a hard acceleration especially in slippery road conditions, you should in a turn, or an abrupt upshift or downshift. Also, when always leave the system on. Butyou can turn the the compact spare tire is on the rear axle, the traction traction control system off if you ever need to. (You control system will cycle and limit acceleration for about should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck the first 15 seconds of driving after each engine start. in sand, mud, ice or snow. See “Rocking Your Vehicle” If your vehicle is in cruise controlwhen the traction in the Index.) control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically disengage. When road conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may re-engage the cruise control. (See “Cruise Control’’ in the Index.)

4-9 To turn the system off, press If your car isequipped with P245/5OZR16 tires, the the button located at the traction control system will automatically turn off at front of the console. speeds above 108mph (174 km/h). (The traction control system warning light will not come on.)When the vehicle speed drops below 103 mph (166 kmh) the system will automatically come on again. Braking in Emergencies With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more than even thevery best braking. Steering The light on the switch will go off, and the traction control system warning light will come on and stay on. Power Steering If the traction control system is limiting wheel spin If you lose power steering assist because the engine when you press the switch, the light on the switch will stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but go off and the warning lightwill come on -- but the it will take much more effort. system won’t turn off right away. It will wait until there’s no longer a current need to limit wheel spin. Steering Tips You can turn the system back on atany time by pressing the switch again. The lighton the button should come Driving on Curves on, and the traction control system warning light should It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed. go off.

4- 10 A lot of the “driver lostcontrol” accidents mentioned on based on good weather and road conditions. Under less the news happen on curves. Here’s why: favorable conditions you’llwant to go slower. Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front traction of the tires against the road surface makes it wheels are straight ahead. possible for the vehicle to change itspath when you turn Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’llunderstand this. accelerate gently into the straightaway. The traction you can getin a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at Steering in Emergencies which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re There are times when steering canbe more effective in a curve, speedis the one factor you can control. than braking. For example, you come over a hill and Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls suddenly accelerate. Both control systems-- steering and out fromnowhere, or a child darts out frombetween acceleration -- have to do their work where the tires meet parked cars and stops right in frontof you. You can the road. Unless you have traction control and the system avoid these problems by braking -- if you can stop is on, adding the sudden acceleration can demand too in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’troom. much of those places. You can lose control. That’s the time for evasive action -- steering around the problem. What should you do if this ever happens? Easeup on the accelerator pedal, steer the vehiclethe way you want it Your Pontiac can perform very well in emergencies like to go, and slow down. these. First apply your brakes. (See “Braking in Emergencies” earlier in this section.) It is better to Speed limitsigns near curves warn that you should remove as muchspeed as you can froma possible adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or right depending on the space available. 4-11 Off-Road Recovery You may find sometime that yourright wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.

I OFF-ROAD RECOVERY / , I

I

An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at ’/// edge of paved surface the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object. If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the The fact that such emergency situations are always accelerator and then, if thereis nothing in the way, steer so possible is a good reason to practice defensivedriving at that your vehicle straddles theedge of the pavement. You all times and wear safety belts properly. can turn the steering wheelup to one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the pavementedge. Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway. 4-12 Passing 0 Do not get too close to thevehicle you want to pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one thing, The driver of a vehicle aboutto pass another ona following too closely reduces your areaof vision, two-lane highway waits for justthe right moment, especially if you’re following a larger vehicle. accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes Also, you won’t have adequate spaceif the vehicle back into the right laneagain. A simple maneuver? ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle ona two-lane reasonable distance. highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the When it looks likea chance to pass is coming up, passing vehicle occupies the same laneas oncoming start to accelerate but stay inthe right lane and traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an errorin don’t get too close. Time yourmove so you will be judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or angercan increasing speed as the time comes to move into the suddenly put the passing driver face to facewith the other lane. If the way is clear topass, you will have a worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision. “running start” that more than makes up for the So here are some tips for passing: distance you would lose by dropping back. And if something happens to causeyou to cancelyour pass, 0 “Drive ahead.” Look down the road,to the sides and to you need only slow down and drop back again and crossroads for situations that mightaffect your passing wait for another opportunity. patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass, waitfor a better time. If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that someoneisn’t trying to 0 Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines. pass you as you pull out to passthe slow vehicle. If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicatea Remember to glance over your shoulderand check turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass the blind spot. (praviding the road ahead is clear). Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line, even if the road seems emptyof approaching traffic.

4-13 Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and Loss of Control start your left lane change signal beforemoving out of the right lane topass. When you are far enough Let’s review what driving experts say about what ahead of the passed vehicleto see its frontin your happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering inside mirror, activate yourright lane changesignal and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the and move back into theright lane. (Remember that tires meet the roadto do what the driver has asked. your right outsidemirror is convex. The vehicle you In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and just passed may seem to befarther away from you constantly seek anescape route or area of less danger. than it really is.) Skidding 0 Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two-lane roads. Reconsiderbefore passing the In a skid, a driver can lose controlof the vehicle. next vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existingconditions, and by not 0 Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly. Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may “overdriving” those conditions. But skids are be slowing down or starting to turn. always possible. The threetypes of skids correspond to your Pontiac’s 0 If you’re being passed, make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you three control systems. Inthe braking skid, your wheels can easea little to the right. aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a curve causestires to slip and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin. A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal. If you have the traction control system,remember: It helps avoid only the acceleration skid.

4-14 If you do not have traction control, or if the system is Driving at Night off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal. If your vehicle starts to slide, easeyour foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs. Of course, traction is reducedwhen water, snow, ice, gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll .A want to slow down and adjust your driving to these I conditions. It is important to slow down onslippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited. While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the surface isslippery until Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. your vehicle is skidding. Learn torecognize warning One reason is that some drivers arelikely to be clues -- such as enough water, ice orpacked snow on impaired -- by alcohol or drugs, with night vision the road to make a“mirrored surface” -- and slow down problems, or by fatigue. when you have any doubt. Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps avoid only the braking skid.

4-15 Here aresome tips on night driving. have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re a Drive defensively. driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. Theymay cut down on glare from headlamps, butthey also make a lot e Don’t drink and drive. of things invisible. 0 Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the You can be temporarily blinded by approaching glare from headlampsbehind you. headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several m Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slow seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you down and keep more space between you and are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who doesn’t other vehicles. lower the high beams, or a vehicle with misaimed keadlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring directly e Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your into the approaching headlamps. headlamps can light up only so much road ahead. Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle e In remote areas, watch for animals. clean -- inside and out. Glare at night is mademuch e If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place worse by dirt on the glass. Even the insideof the glass and rest. can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzleand flash more than clean glass would, Night Vision making the pupils of your eyes contractrepeatedly. No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as Remember that your headlamps lightup far lessof a we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old roadway when you are ina turn or curve. Keep your driver may require at least twice asmuch light to see the eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly same thing at night as a 20-year-old. lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes What you do inthe daytime can also affect your night be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer fromnight vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and sunshine you are wiseto wear sunglasses. Your eyes will aren’t even aware of it.

4-16 Driving in Rain and onWet Roads your tire-to-road traction isn’tas good as on dry roads. And, if your tires don’t havemuch tread left, you’ll get even less traction.It’s always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall whileyou are driving.The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement. The heavier th’erain, the harderit is to see. Even if your windshield wiper bladesare in good shape, a heavyrain can make it harderto see road signs andtraffic signals, pavement markings, the edgeof the road and even people walking. It’s wise to keep your windshieldwiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshieldwasher tank filled with washer fluid. Replace your windshieldwiper inserts when theyshow signs of streaking or missing c areas on the windshield, or when stripsof rubber start I to separate from the inserts.

Rain and wet roads can meandriving trouble. On a wet road, you can’t stop, accelerate orturn as well because

4-17 Wet brakes can cause accidents.They won’t work as well in a quick stopand may cause pulling to one side. You could lose controlof the vehicle. After driving through a large puddleof water or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally.

Driving too fast through large water puddlesor even going through somecar washes can cause problems, too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you can’t, try to slow down beforeyou hit them.

4-18 Hydroplaning Driving Through Deep Standing Water Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water. This can happenif the road is wet enough and you’re NOTICE: going fast enough.When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road. If you drive too quickly throughdeep puddies or standing water, water can come in through your Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But itcan if your engine’s air intake and badly damage your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or engine. Never drive through water thatis slightly more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone lower than the underbodyof your vehicle. If you poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning. through them very slowly. Hydroplaning usually happens athigher speeds. There just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The Some Other Rainy Weather Tips best advice isto slow down when it is raining. Besides slowing down, allow some extra following distance. And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray. Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See “Tires” in the Index.)

4-19 City Driving Here are ways to increase yoursafety in city driving: Know the best way to get to where you are going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the cityjust asyou would fora cross-country trip. Try to use the freeways thatrim and crisscross most large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See the next part, “Freeway Driving.”) Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light is there because the corneris busy enoughto need it. When a light turns green, and just before you start to move, check both ways for vehicles that havenot cleared the intersection or mav be running the red light.

One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them, You’ll want to watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.

4-20 Freeway Driving The most important adviceon freeway driving is: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Driveat the same speed most of the other drivers aredriving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane ona freeway as a passing lane. At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp,you should begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow. Once you are on the freeway, adjust yourspeed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass. Before changing lanes, check yourmirrors. Then use your turn signal. Mile formile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways, Just before you leave the lane,glance quickly over your expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest shoulder to make sure there isn’t anothervehicle in your of all roads. But they have their own specialrules. “blind” spot. Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you service, have it done before starting out.Of course, allow a reasonable following distance.Expect to move you’ll find experienced and able service experts in slightly slower at night. Pontiac dealerships all across North America. They’ll be ready and willing to help if you need it. When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not, Here aresome things you can check beforea trip: under any circumstances, stopand back up. Drive on to 0 Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are the next exit. all windows clean inside and outside? The exit ramp canbe curved, sometimes quite sharply. a Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape? The exitspeed is usually posted. Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not all levels? to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance a Lamps: Are they all worlung? Are the lenses clean? at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower than you actually are, a Tires: Th’eyare vitally important to a safe, trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for Before Leaving on a Long Trip long-distance driving? Are thetires all inflatedto the Make sure you’reready. Try to be well rested. If you recomended pressure? must start when you’re not fresh -- such as after a day’s a Weather Fureecasts: What’s the weather outlook work -- don’t plan to maketoo many miles that first part along your route? Shouldyou delay your trip a short of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you time to avoid a major storm system? can easily drive in, 0 Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps? Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs

4-22 Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Callit highway hypnosis, lackof awareness, or whatever. There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery, along with the humof the tires on the road, the drone of the engine,and the rushof the wind against the vehicle that can makeyou sleepy. Don’t let it happen to you! If it does, yourvehicle can leavethe road in less than a second, and you could crash and be injured. What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be aware that it canhappen. Then here are some tips:

0 Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a comfortably cool interior.

Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to Driving on steephills or mountainsis different from the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your driving in flator rolling terrain. instruments frequently. If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness onthe highway as an emergency.

4-23 If you drive regularlyin steep country, or if you’re planning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips saferand more enjoyable. Keep your vehicle in goodshape. Check all fluid Coasting downhill!in NEUTRAL (N) or with levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and the ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will transmission. Theseparts can work hard on have to do all the work of slowing down. They mountain roads. could getso hot that they wouldn’t work well. Know how to go down hills. Themost important You would then have poor braking or even none thing to knowis this: let your engine do some of the going down a hill. You c’ouldcrash. Always have slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go your engine running and your vehicle in gear down a steep or longkill. when you! go downhill.

then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let your engine assistyour brakes on a steep

4-24 Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down Winter Driving to a lower gear.The lower gears help cool yourengine and transmission, andyou can climb the hill better.

0 Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane. As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident. You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.

Here are some tips for winter driving:

0 Have your Pontiac in good shape forwinter. You may want to put winteremergency supplies in your vehicle.

4-25 Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time, those places where your tires meetthe road probably have good traction. However, if there is snow or icebetween your tires and the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be very careful.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, somewinter outer .. . ‘ ...... ,1...... <. ,..I .. -T---T clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and a --i couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe conditions, includea small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle.

4-26 What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.But wet when you make a hard stop ona slippery road. Even ice canbe even more troublebecause it may offer the though you have the anti-lock braking system, you’ll least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about want to begin stopping soonerthan you would on dry freezing (32”F; 0”C) and freezing rain begins to fall. pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index. Try to avoid driving onwet ice until salt and sand crews Allow greater following distance on any can get there. slippery road. Whatever the condition smooth ice, packed, blowing -- Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine or loose snow -- drive with caution, until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an If you have traction control, keep the system on.It will otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in improve your ability to accelerate when driving on a shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around slippery road. Even though your vehiclehas a traction clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges. control system, you’ll want to slow down and adjust Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may your driving to the road conditions. See “Traction remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If Control System” in the Index, you see a patch of ice aheadof you, brake before you If you don’t have the traction control system, accelerate are onit. Try not to brake while you’re actually on gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If you the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers. accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more. If You're Caught in a Blizzard Tie a red cloth to your vehicleto alert policethat you've been stopped by the snow. Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you. If you have no blankets, or extra clothing, makebody insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,floor mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothingto keep warm.

If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a serious situation. You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow. Here are some things to do to summon helpand keep yourself and your passengers safe: Turn on your hazard flashers. You can run the engine to keep warm, butbe careful.

4-28 Run your engine only as longas you must. Thissaves fuel. When you run the engine, makeit go a little faster CAUTION: .. A than justidle. That is, push the acceleratorslightly. This uses less fuel for the heat thatyou get and it keepsthe Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle. battery charged.You will need a well-charged batteryto This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling lateron to get inside.CO could overcome youand kill with your headlamps. Letthe heater run for awhile. you. You can’t see it or smell it, so you might not Then, shut the engineoff and close thewindow almost know it is in your vehicle.Clear away snowfrom all theway to preserve the heat. Start the engine again around the base of your vehicle, especiallyany and repeat this onlywhen you feel really uncomfortable that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check from the cold. But doit as little as possible. Preserve the around again from timeto time to be sure snow fuel as long asyou can. To help keepwarm, you can get doesn’t collect there. out of the vehicle and do some fairlyvigorous exercises Open a window just a little on the side of the every half hour or so until help comes. vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will help keep CO out.

4-29 Loading Your Vehicle -. MFB BY GENERAL MOTORS CORP TIRE-LOADING INFORMATION DATE GVWW GAWR FRT GAWR RR cm OCCUPANTS VEHICLE CAP. WT. FRT. CTR. RR. TOTAL LBS. KG THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLI- MAX. LOADING & GVWR SAME AS VEHICLE CABLE U.S. FE:DERAL MOTOR VEHICLE CAPACITY WEIGHT XXX COLD TIRE SAFETY, BUMPER, AND THEFT PREVENTION TIRE SIZE SPEED PRESSURE STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF RTG PSI/KPa MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE. FRT. RR. SPA. IF TIRES ARE HOT, ADD 4PS1/28KPa SEE OWNER'S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL I'NFORMATION The other labelis the Certification label, foundon the rear edge of the driver's door. It tells you the gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR includes the weight Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. Never may properly carry. The Tire-Loading Information l'abel exceed the GVWR for yourvehicle, or the Gross Axle found on the driver's door tells you the proper size, Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the frontor rear axle. speed rating and recommended inflation pressures for the tires on your vehicle. It also gives you important And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread information about the number of people that can be in it out. Don't ca more than 100 lbs. (45 kg) in your your vehicle and the total weight that you can carry, rear area. This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed options. If you put things inside your vehicle-- like suitcases, tools, packages or anything else-- they will go as fastas the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they’llkeep going. Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash. Put things in the rear areaof your vehicle. Do not loadyour vehicle anyheavier than the Try to spread the weight evenly. GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can inside the vehicle so that some of them are break, or it can change the way your vehicle above the tops of the seats. handles. These couldcause you to lose control. 0 Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle. your vehicle. When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can. Don’t leave a seat folded down unless you need to.

4-31 Towing a Trailer NOTICE:

Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow properly, you can lose control when you pull a the advice in this part, andsee your Pontiac trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy,the dealer for important information about towing a brakes may not work well -- or even at all. You trailer with your vehicle. and your passengers could be seriouslyinjured. Pull a trailer only if you have followed allthe Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the steps in this section. Ask your Pontiac dealer for 3800 and 5.7L engines and proper trailer towing advice and information about towing a trailer equipment. To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity with your vehicle. is for your vehicle,you should read the inforrnation in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later inthis section. But trailering is different than just driving your vehicleby itself. Trailering means changes in handling, durability and fuel economy. Successful, safe traileringtakes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly. That’s the reason for this part.In it are many time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these are important for your safety andthat of your passengers. So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer.

4-32 Load-pulling components suchas the engine, 0 Obey speed limit restrictionswhen towing a trailer, transmission, rear axle, wheel assemblies and tiresare Don’t drive faster than the maximumposted speed forced towork harder against the dragof the added for trailers (or no more than55 mph (90 km/h))to weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively save wearon your vehicle’s parts. higher speeds and under greater loads, generating extra Three important considerations have to withdo weight: heat. What’s more, the trailer adds considerablyto wind resistance, increasing the pulling requirements. 0 the weight of the trailer, If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer 0 the weight of the trailer tongue If you do, here are some important points: and the total weight on yourvehicle’s tires. 0 There aremany different laws, includingspeed limit Weight of the Trailer restrictions, having todo with trailering. Make sure your rig willbe legal, notonly where you live but How heavy can a trailer safely be? also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this It should neverweigh more than 1,500 pounds (680 kg) information canbe state or provincial police. under normal driving conditions.It should never weigh 0 Consider usinga sway control. You can ask a hitch more than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg)when driven on long dealer about sway controls. grades at high ambient temperatures. Above90” F (32°C).But even that canbe too heavy. 0 Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first1,000 miles (1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven.Your engine, It depends on how you plan to use your rig.For axle or other parts could be damaged. example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how much your vehicleis used to pulla 0 Then, during the first500 miles (800 km) that you trailer are all important. And,it can alsodepend on any tow a trailer, don’t drive over50 mph (80 km/h) and special equipmentthat you have on yourvehicle. don’t make starts at full throttle. This helpsyour engine and otherparts of your vehicle wear in atthe heavier loads.

4-33 You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice, or you can write us at: : Pontiac Division Customer Assistance Center One Pontiac Plaza Pontiac, MI 48340-2952 In Canada, write to: General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre A B 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer weight to measure because it affects the total capacity tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded weight of your vehicle. The capacity weight includes the trailer weight (€3).If you have a weight-distributing curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in hitch, thetrailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. And the total loaded trailer weight (€3). if you will tow a trailer, you must subtract the tongue load from your vehicle’s capacity weight because your After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading then thetongue, separately, to see if the weights are Your Vehicle” in the Index for moreinformation about proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to getthem right your vehicle’s maximum loadcapacity. simply by moving some items aroundin thetrailer.

4-34 Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires Safety Chains Be sureyour vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper You should always attach chains between your vehicle limit for cold tires. You’ll find thesenumbers on the and your trailer. Cross the safety chainsunder the tongue Certification label at the rear edgeof the driver’s door or of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop tothe road see “Loading Your Vehicle’’ in the Index. Then be sure if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions you don’t go over the GVW limit for yourvehicle; about safety chains may be provided by the hitch including the weight of the trailer tongue. manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety Hitches chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always It’s important to have the correcthitch equipment. leave just enough slackso you can turn with your rig. Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground. few reasons why you’ll need theright hitch. Hereare some rules to follow: Trailer Brakes If your trailer weighs morethan 1,000 lbs. (450 kg) 0 The bumpers on your vehicle are not intended for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other loaded, then it needs its own brakes -- and they must be adequate. Be sureto read and followthe instructions for bumper-type hitches to them. Use onlya frame-mounted hitch that doesnot attach to the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install,adjust and the bumper. maintain them properly. Because you have anti-lock brakes, do not try to tap into your vehicle’s brake 0 Will you have to make anyholes in the body of your system. If you do, both brake systems won’t work well, vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do, or at all. then be sure to sealthe holes later when you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon monofid.e (CO) from yourexhaust can get into your vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide’’ in the Index). Dirt and water can, too.

4-35 Driving with a Trailer Following Distance Towing a trailer requires a certain amountof experience. Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you Before setting out forthe open road, you’ll want to get would when driving your vehicle withouta trailer. This to know your rig, Acquaint yourself with the feel. of can helpyou avoid situations that require heavy braking handling and braking with theadded weight of the and sudden turns. trailer. And always keep in mindthat the vehicleyou are driving isnow a good deal longer andnot nearly as Passing responsive as your vehicleis by itself. You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform you’re towinga trailer. And, because you’re a good deal (and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector, longer, you’llneed to go much farther beyond the lamps, tires and mirror adjustment.If the trailer has passed vehicle beforeyou can return to your lane. electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailermoving and then apply the trailer brake controllerby hand to be sure Backing Up the brakesare working. This letsyou check your Hold the bottomof the steering wheelwith one hand. electrical connectionat the same time. Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand During your trip, check occasionally to be surethat the to the left.To move the trailer to the right, move your load is secure, and that the lamps anyand trailer brakes hand to the right. Always backup slowly and,if are still working. possible, have someone guide you.

4-36 Making Turns Driving On Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift I NOTICE: down, you might haveto use your brakesso much that they would gethot and no longer workwell. Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to comein contact with the On a long uphill grade, shift downand reduce your vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid speed toaround 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the possibility of engine and transmission overheating. making very sharp turns while trailering. If you are towing a trailer and you have an automatic transmission with overdrive,you may prefer to drive in When you’re turning with a trailer, make widerturns than THIRD (3) instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (a) normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strikesoft shoulders, (or, as you need to, a lower gear).Or, if you have a curbs, road signs, treesor other objects. Avoid jerky or manual transmission with FIFTH (5)or SIXTH (6) gear sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance. and you are towing a trailer, it’s better not to Turn Signals When Towing a nailer use FIFTH (5) or SIXTH(6) gear. Just drive in FOURTH (4) (drive in FIFTH(5) if you have a The green arrows on your instrument panelwill flash six-speed manual transmission) or, as you need to, whenever you signal a turn or lane change.Properly a lower gear. hooked up, the trailer lampswill also flash, telling other drivers you’re about toturn, change lanesor stop. When towing a trailer, the green arrows on your instrument panel will flash forturns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you are seeingyour signal when they are not. It’s important to checkoccasionally to be surethe trailer bulbs are still working. 4-37 Parking on Hills When You Are Ready to Leave After You really should not park your vehicle,with a trailer Parking on a Hill attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig 1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedaldown could start to move. People can be injured, both and while you: your vehicle andthe trailer canbe damaged. Start your engine; But if you ever have to parkyour rig on a hill,here’s how to doit: Shift into a gear; and 1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into Release the parking brake. PARK (P) yet, or intogear for a manual transmiss’ion. 2. Let up on the brake pedal. 2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels. 3. Drive slowly until the traileris clear of the chocks. 3, When the wheel C~OGBSare in place, release the 4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks. regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load. Maintenance When Trailer Towing 4. Reapply the regular brakes,Then apply your parking brake, and then shift toPARK (P), or REVERSE (R) Your vehicle willneed service more often when you’re for a manual transmission. pulling atrailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more on this. Things that are especially important in trailer 5. Release the regularbrakes. operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system and brake adjustment. Eachof these is covered in this manual, and the Index will helpyou find them quickly, If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these sections beforeyou start yourtrip. Check periodicallyto see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight.

4-38 b& NOTES

4-39 b NOTES

4-40 Section 5 Problems on the Road

Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that canoccur on the road.

5-2 Hazard Warning Flashers 5-26 If a Tire Goes Flat 5-3 Jump Starting 5-26 Changing a FlatTire 5-8 Towing Your Vehicle 5-38Compact Spare Tire 5-14 Engine Overheating 5-39 If You’re Stuck:In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow

5-1 Hazard Warning Flashers Your hazard warning flashers letyou warn others. They also let police know-you have a problem. Your front and rear turn signal lampswill flash on andoff. Press the button in to make your front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in, or even if the key isn’t in.

5-2 To turn off the flashers, pull out on the collar. JANTION:

I Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous because: They contain acid that can burn you. They contain gas that can explode or ignite. They contain enough electricity toburn you. If you don’t followthese steps exactly, someor all When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn of these things can hurt you. signals won’t work. Other Warning Devices If YOU carry reflectivetriangles, you can set one up at NOTICE: the side of the road about300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle. Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered by Jump Starting your warranty. If your battery has run down, you may want to use Trying to start your Pontiac by pushing or another vehicle and some jumpercables to start your pulling it could damage your vehicle, evenif you Pontiac. But please use thefollowing steps to do have a manual transmission. And if you havean it safely. automatic transmission, it won’t start that way.

5-3 ~~ 1.. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery with a negative groundsystem.

If you leave your radio on, it could be badly NOTICE: ~~~ damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system witha negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged. 4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. 2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach, but besure the vehicles aren’t touching each oth’er.If they are, it could cause a ground I connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to start your Pontiac, and thebad grounding could An electric fan can start upeven WLA the engine damage the electrical systems. is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood 3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette electric fan. lighter. Turn off all lamps thataren’t needed as well as radios. This will avoid sparks and help save both 5. Find the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on batteries. In addition, it could save your radio! each battery.

5-4 6. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock. The vehicles could be damaged, too. Using a match near a battery can cause battery Before you connect thecables, here are somebasic gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this, things you should know. Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and negative (-) will go to negative (-) and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if or a metal engine part. Don’t connect positive (+) to you need more light. negative (-) or you’ll geta short that would damage Be sure the battery has enough water. You don’t the battery and maybe otherparts, too. need to add water to the Delco Freedom’ battery installed in everynew GM vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount 1 A CAUTION: of fluid is there.If it is low, add water to take care I of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas could Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you be present. badly. Keep yourhands away from moving parts Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. once the engines are running. Don’t getit on you. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with

water and get medicalhelp immediately. * 8. Don’t let the other end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

7. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+> terminal ‘of the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one, Don’t use the junction block on your Pontiac.

5-6 9. Now connect the black negative (-) cable to the good (-) battery’s negative terminal. 10. Attach the cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next from the dead battery, but not near engine parts that step. The other end of the negative (-) cable doesn’t move. The electrical connection is just as good go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy unpainted there, but the chanceof sparks getting back to the metal part on the engineof the vehicle with the battery is much less. dead battery. 11. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine fora while.

5-7 12. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery. Towing Your Vehicle If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs service. Try to have a GM dealer or a professional towing service tow your Pontiac. 13. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent electrical shorting. Take care that they don’t touch If your vehicle has been changed or modified since it each other or any other metal. was factory-new by adding aftermarket items like fog lamps, aero skirting, or special tires and wheels, these instructions may not be correct. Before you do anything, turn on the hazard warning flashers. When you call, tell the towing service: 0 That your vehicle cannot be towed from the front or rear with sling-type equipment.

0 That your vehicle has rear-wheel drive. The make, model and year of your vehicle.

0 Whether you can still move the shift lever. If there was an ac’cident,what was damaged. When the towing service arrives, let the tow operator know that this manual contains detailed towing A. Heavy Metal Engine Part instructions and illustrations. The operator may want to B. Good Battery see them. C. Dead Battery

5-8 A vehicle can fall from a car car adequately secured. This can cause a collision, serious personal injury andvehicle damage.The vehicle should be tightly secured with chains or steel cablesbefore it is transported. Don’t use substitutes (ropes, leather straps, canvas webbing, etc.) that can be cut by sharp edges underneath the towed vehicle. Always use T-hooks inserted in the T-hook slots. Never use J-hooks, They will damage drivetrain and To help avoid injury to you or others: suspension components. Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that is being towed. When your vehicle is being towed, have the ignition key 0 Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds. turned to the OFF position. The steering wheel should Never tow with damaged parts not be clamped in a straight-ahead position, with a clamping fully secured. device designed for towing service. Do not use the vehicle’s steering column lock for this. The transmission 0 Never get under your vehicle after it has been liftedby the tow truck. should be in NEUTRAL (N) and the parking brake released. Always secure the vehicle on each side with separate safety chains when towing it. 0 Never use J-hooks, Use T-hooks instead. Don’t have your vehicle towedon the drivewheels unless you must. If the vehicle must be towedon the drive wheels, be sure to follow the speedand distance restrictions later in this section or your transmission will be damaged.If these limits mustbe exceeded, thenthe drive wheels have to be supportedon a dolly, Front Towing Tow Limits - 35 mph (56 kd),50 miles (80 km)

NOTICE: - Do not tow with sling-type equipmentor fascidfog light damage willoccur. Use wheel lift or car carrier equipment. Additional ramping may be required for car Attach T-hook chains to slots in frame rearward of front carrier equipment. wheels on both sides. Use safety chains andwheel straps. I NOTICE: I Do not attach winch cables or J-hooks to suspension components when using carcarrier equipment. Always use T-hooksinserted in the T-hook slots,

5- 10 I NOTICE: I Take care not to damage the brake pipes and hoses or theABS sensor and wiring.

NOTICE:

Towing a vehicle over rough surfaces could damage a vehicle. Damage can occurfrom vehicle-to-ground or vehicle-to-wheel-lift-equipment contact. To help avoid damage, installa towing dolly and raise vehicle until adequate clearanceis obtained Attach a separate safety chain around outboard end of between the groundand/or wheel-lift equipment. each lower control arm.

5-11 Rear Towing NOTICE:

Do not tow with sling-typeequipment or rear bumpervalance will be damaged, Use wheel-lift or car carrierequipment. Additional ramping may be required for car-carrier equipment. Use safety chains and wheel straps. Towing a vehicle over roughsurfaces could damage a vehicle. Damagecan occur from vehicle to ground or vehicle to wheel lift equipment contact. To help avoiddamage, install a towing dollyand raise vehicle until adequate clearance is obtained between the ground and/or wheel-lift 'equipment. Do not attach winch cablesor J-hooks to suspension components when usingcar carrier equipment. Always useT-hooks inserted in the T-book slots.

5-12 r

Attach T-hook chains in front of rear wheels in bottom Attach a separate safety chain around each outboard end of frame rail on both sides. of the rear axle.

I NOTICE: Take care not to damage thebrake pipes and cables.

5-13 Engine Overheating You will find a coolant temperaturegage on your Pontiac's instrument panel. You may also find a LOW COOLANT warning lighton your Pontiac instrument Steam from an overheated engine can L,m you panel (V8 Engine only). badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away If Steam Is Coming From Engine from the engine if you see or hear steam coming Your from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no signof steam or 'coolant before you open thehood. If you keep driving when your engine is overheated, the liquids in it cancatch fire. You or others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if it overheats, and getout of the vehicle until the engine iscool. - NOTICE:

If your enginecatches fire because yon keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty.

5-14 If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine If you no longer havethe overheat warning, you can drive. Just tobe safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes. If you get the overheat warning butsee or hear no If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes drive normally. the engine can geta little too hotwhen you: If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your Climb a long hill on a hot day. vehicle right away. Stop after high-speed driving. If there’s still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine Idle for long periods in traffic. for two or threeminutes while you’re parked, to see if the warning stops. But then, if you still have the Tow a trailer. warning, turn ofSthe engineand get everyone out of the If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam, vehicle until it cools down. try this for a minute or so: You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service 1. If you have an air conditioner, turn it off. help right away. 2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what speed and open the window as necessary. you’ll see: 3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N); otherwise, shift to the highest gear while driving -- AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (@)or DRIVE (D) for automatictransmissions. .. I /A CAUTION: An electric fan under the hood canstart up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothingand tools away from any underhood electricfan.

If the coolant inside th'e coolant recovery tankis boiling, don't do anything else until it cools down. When it is cool, removethe coolant recovery tankcap and look at the dipstick.

A. Cool - ~ :Zecovery Tank The coolant l'evel should be at FULL COLD. B. Radiator Pressure Cap If it isn't, you may have a leak in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhereelse in C. Electric Engine Fan the cooling system.

5-16 How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Recovery Tank If you haven’t found a problemyet, but the coolant level Heater and radiatorhoses, and other engine isn’t at FULL COLD add a 50/50 mixture of clean water parts, can be very hot.Don’t touch them. If you (preferably distilled) and DEX-COOL@(silicate-free) do, you can be burned. antifreeze at the coolant recovery tank. (See “Engine, Coolant’’ in the Index for more information.) Don’t run theengine if there is a leak.If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could cause an engine fire, and you could be burned. Get any leak fixed before youdrive the vehicle. Adding onlyplain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid likealcohol, can boil beforethe proper NOTICE: coolant mix will. Your vehicle’scoolant warning system isset forthe proper coolant mix. With Engine damage from running your engine plain water or the wrong mix, your engine could without coolant isn’t coveredby your warranty. get toohot but you wouldn’t getthe overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire andyou or If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check to others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mix of clean see if the electric engine fansare running. If the engine water and DEX-COOL@coolant. is overheating, both fans should be running.If they aren’t, your vehicle needs service.

5-17 ~ NOTICE: 1 A CAUTION: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the Steam and sc’aldingliquids from a hot cooling engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. system can blow out and burnyou badly. They Use the recommended coolant and the proper are under pressure, and if you turn the pressure coolant mix. cap -- even a little I-they can come out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the cooling system, including the pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling systemand pressure cap tocool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap.

You can beburned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts arehot enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.

When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at 1 FULL COLD start your vehicle. If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant mix directly to the radiator but be sure the cooling system is cool before you do it.

5-18 How to Add Coolant to the Radiator (V6 Engine Only)

I NOTICE: Your engine has a specific radiatorfill procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could cause your engine to overheat and be severely damaged.

1. You can remove the pressure cap when the cooling system, including the pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is no longer hot.Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first stops. (Don’t press down while turning the pressure cap.) If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressureleft.

5-19 2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push 3. After the engine cools, open the coolant air down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap. bleed valve. 3800 V6 (VIN Code M): There isone bleed valve. It is located on the thermostat housing. 4. Fill.the radiatorwith the proper DEX-COOL@ coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck. You can be burnet 'you spimm2oolant on hot engine parts. Coolantcontains ethylene glycol If you see a! stream of coolant coming from an air bleed valve, close thevalve. Otherwise, close the and it will burn if the engine parts are hot valve after the radiator is filled. enough. Don't spill coolant onhot a engine.

5-20 5. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to FULL HOT 7. Start the engine and let it run until you can feelthe 6. Put the cap backon the coolant recovery tank, but upper radiator hose getting hot.Watch out forthe leave the radiator pressure capoff. engine fan(s). 8. By this time, the coolant level insidethe radiator filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL@coolant mixture through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck.

5-21 How to Add Coolant to the Radiator (V8 Engine Only)

NOTICE:

~~ ~ The LT1 Engine (Code P) has a specific radiator fill procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could cause your engine to overheatand be severely damaged.

~~

9. Then replace the pressurecap. At any time during this procedure if coolant begins toflow out of the filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap.Be sure the arrows on the pressure cap line up likethis.

5-22 1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the 2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap. and upper radiator hose, nois longer hot.Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwiseuntil it first stops. (Don’t press down while turning the pressure cap.) If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot there is still some pressure left. engine parts. Coolant contains ethyleneglycol, and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Don’tspill coolant on a hot engine.

5-23 3. After the engine cools, open the airbleed valves on 4. Fill with the proper DEX-COOL' coolant mixture. the heater return hose and water pump inlet. Add coolant until you see a steady stream of coolant coming from thebleed valves. 5. Close the bleed valves. 6. Continue to fill the radiator up to the base of the filler neck. 7. Rinse or wipe the spilled coolant from the engine and compartment.

5-24 8. Start the engine and allow it to run in idle for approximately four minutes. By this time, the coolant level inside theradiator will be lower. Add more of the proper mix through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck.

10. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the proper level. For a complete drain, flush and refill, see your Pontiac dealer or a Pontiac Firebird Service Manual.To purchase a service manual, see “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index. 9. Shut the engineoff and replace the pressure cap. Be sure the arrows on the capline up like this.

5-25 If a Tire Goes Flat Changing a Flat Tire It’s unusual for a tireto ‘‘blow out’’ while you’redriving, If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes by driving slowlyt,o a level place.Turn on your hazard out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak outslowly. warning flashers. But if you should ever havea “blowout,” here are fewa tips about what to expect andwhat to do: If a front tire fails, the flat tire will createdrag a that pulls the vehicle toward that side.Take your footoff the accelerator pedal andgrip the steering wheel firmly, Cham- ng a tire can cause an injury. The vehicle Steer to maintain lane position, and thengently brake to can slip off the jack androll over you or other a st,ot,well out of the traffic lane. people. You and they could be badly injured. A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, actsmuch like a Find a level place to change your tire. To help skid andmay require the same correction you’d usea in prevent the vehicle from moving: skid. Inany rear blowout, removeyour foot from the 1. Set the parking brake firmly, accelerator pedal. Get the vehicleunder control by Put automatic transmissionshift lever in steering theway you want the vehicle togo, It may be 2. an very bumpy and noisy, but you can stillsteer. Gently PARK (P), or shift a manual transmission tu brake to a stop -- well off the roadif possible, FIRST (1) or REWRSE (R). 3. Turn off the engine. If a tire goes flat, the next part showshow to use your jacking equipment to change a flat tiresafely. To be even more certain the vehicle wan? move, you can put blocks at the front and rearof the tire farthest away from the one being changed. That would be the tire on the other side of the

vehicle, at the opposite~ end,

5-26 ...... On convertible models, must also remove the ...... you ...... convertible topprotection panel. It’s at the upper back of ...... the trunk. Turn the two screw knobs under the trunk ...... edge a quarter turn left (counterclockwise)to remove ...... the panel.

The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and change a tire.

Removing the Spare Tire andTools Find the plastic screw heads in the trim panel over the The equipmentyou’ll need is in the right (passenger) spare tire. (See “Compact Spare Tire” later in this rear area behind the trim panel. section for moreinformation about thecompact spare.) Use a coin or a key to turn the screw headsuntil the First you must remove the close-out panel. See slots point front and back. Gently Iift the trim panel and “Close-Out Panel” in the Index. move it out of the way.

5-27 If you have speakers in thetrim panel, you may have to disconnect the wire from thespeaker. The speaker wire may be long enough to remove the trimpanel without disconnecting the wire.

Remove the wing nut and adapter andpull out the spare.

To remove thejack and wheel wrench,loosen and remove the bolt and remove the plastic cover.

5-28 The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A) and wheel The jack has a bolt at the end. Attach the wheel wrench wrench (B). to the jack bolt. Turn the wheel wrench to the right to raise the lift head a little.

5-29 If your wheel hasa bolt-on center cap, loosen the plastic Each wheel has one locknut in placeof the standard caps using the wheel wrench. wheel nut. A special wheel lock key (removal tool) and instructions arelocated in the center console.Attach the wheel lockkey to the socket of the wheel wrench. Remove the locking whe'el nut by turning counterclockwise.

5-30 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire

Position thejack under thevehicle. There is a notch in the vehicle’s rocker flangeon the coupe model. Raise thejack head untilit fits firmly into the notch 1. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all thewheel nuts. nearest the flat tire. Don’t remove themyet. On convertible models, placethe jack in a similar location.

5-31 Getting under a vehicle whenit is jacked L= is dangerous. If the vehicle slipsoff the jack, you could bebadly injured or killed. Neverget under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.

NOTICE: I Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly 2. Stay away from moldings or fender flanges toavoid positioned will damage the vehicle or may allow damaging them. the vehicle to fall off the jack. Be sure to fit the Put the compact tirenear you. jack lift head into the proper location before raising your vehicle.

5-32 3. Remove any rust or dirt from thewheel bolts, mounting surfaces and spare wheel.

Raise the vehicleby rotating the wheelwrench clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enoughoff the ground so there is enough room for the spare tireto fit. Remove all the wheelnuts and takeoff the flat tire.

5-33 ~ Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts become looseafter a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove anyrust ordirt from the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to get allthe rust or dirt off. Replace the wheel nuts with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held againstthe hub.

Never use oil or grease on studsor nuts. If you do, the nuts might comeloose. Your wheelcould fall off, causing aserious accident,

5-34 5. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly ina criss-cross sequence as shown.

4. Lower the vehicleby rotating the wheel wrench counterclockwise. Lower thejack completely.

5-35 Don’t try to put a center cap on your compact spare tire. It won’t fit. Store the centercap in the rear area until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced.

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose NOTICE: and even come off. This could lead to an accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have Center caps won’t fit on your compact spare. If to replace them, be sure to get newGM original you try to puta center cap on your compact equipment wheel nuts. spare, you could damage the cover or @hespare. Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the 1 nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 100 lb-ft Sto-5g a Flat or Spr-s Tirp --d To& (140 N.m).

--

NOTICE: Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose brake pulsation and rotordamage. To avoid 1 equipment could strike someone. Store allthese wheel expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the ~ in the proper place. nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification.

5-36 Replace thejack, wheel wrench and flat tire using the storage instructions. Whenyou replace the trim panel, be sure totuck it under the weatherstrip.

1: Trim Panel 2. Bolt 3. Cover 4. Jack 5. Wing Nut 6. Adapter 7. Compact Spare Tire 8. Full-Size Tire 9. Carpet Flap 10. Tire Storage Bolt 11. Convertible Top Protection 12. Knob

5-37 Compact Spare Tire When the compactspare is on the rear axle, the optional traction control system will cycle and limit acceleration Although the compact spare tire was fully inflatedwhen for about the first15 seconds of driving after each your vehicle was new, it can lose air aftera time. Check engine start. the inflation pressure regularly.It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spareon your vehicle, YOU NOTICE: should stop as soon as possible andmake sure your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is If the compact spareis used as a rear tire,do not made to perform well at speedsup to 65 mph drive faster than50 mph (SO km/h). Damage to (105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), the rear axle may occurif the compact spare is so you can finish your trip and have your full-size tire driven faster than50 mph (80 kmh). repaired or replacedwhere you want. (When the compact spareis used on the rear axle, seeNotice below.) Of course, it’s best to replaceyour spare with a full-size tire as soon as you can. Your spare will last longer and be in good shape in caseyou need it again.

5-38 :f You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, NOTICE: Ice or Snow When the compact spare is installed, don’ttake What you don’t want to do when your vehicle is stuck is your vehicle through an automatic vehicle wash to spin your wheels too fast.The method known as with guide rails.The compact spare can get “rocking” can help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must use caution. caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle. 1

Don’t use your compact spareon other vehicles. And don’t mix your compact sparetire or wheel with If you let your tires spin at high speed, theycan other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare explode, and you or others could beinjured. And, tire and its wheel together. the transmission or other partsof the vehicle can overheat. Thatcould cause an engine compartment fire or other damage. When you’re NOTICE: stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’t spin the wheels above35 mph (55 km/h) as shown Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare. Using on the speedometer. them can damage your vehicle and can damage the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on your compact spare.

5-39 Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out NOTICE: First, turnyour steering wheel left and right.That will b clear the area around your front wheels.If your vehicle Spinning your wheels can destroy partsof your has traction control,you should turn thesystem off. (See vehicle as wellas the tires. Ifyou spin the wheels “Traction Control System”in the Index.) Then shift too fast while shiftingyour transmission back back and forth betweenREVERSE (R) and a forward and forth, youcan destroy your transmission. gear (or with a manual transmission, betweenFIRST (I) I or SECOND (2)and REVERSE (R)), spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal For information about using tire chains on your vehicle, while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator see “Tire Chains” in the Index. pedal when the transmission isin gear. If that doesn’t get you out aftera few tries,you may need to be towed out. If you do need to be towed out, see“Towing Your Vehicle’’ in the Index.

5-40 Section 6 Service and Appearance Care

Here you will find information about the careof your Pontiac. This section beginswith service and fuel information, and then it shows how to check imDortantI fluid and lubricant levels. Thereis also technical informationabout your vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.

6-2 Service 6-2 6-49 Tires 6-3 Fuel 6-58 Appearance Care 6-5 Fuels in ForeignCountries 6-5 8 Cleaning the Insideof Your Pontiac 6-6 Filling Your Tank 6-61 Care of Safety Belts 6- 8 CheckingThings Under the Hood 6-63 Cleaning the Outsideof Your Pontiac 6- 12 EngineOil 6- 64 Aluminum or Chrome Wheels 6-18 Air Cleaner 4-65 Tires 6-22Automatic Transmission Fluid 6-66 Underbody Maintenance 6-27Manual Transmission Fluid 6-67 Appearance Care Materials Chart 6-29 EngineCoolant 6-68 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 6-33 PowerSteering Fluid 6-68 Service Parts Identification Label 6-35 Windshield Washer Fluid 6-68 Electrical System 6-36 Brakes 6-73 Replacement Bulbs 6-40 Battery 6-73 Capacities and Specifications 6-4 1 BulbReplacement

6-1 Service Doing Your Own Service Work Your Pontiac dealer knowsyour vehicle best and wants If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll you to be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your want to get the proper Pontiac Service Manual.It tells dealer for all your service needs.You’ll get genuine GM you much more abouthow to service your Pontiac than parts and GM-trained and supported service people. this manual can.To order the proper service manual,see “Service and Owner Publications” thein Index. We hope you’ll want to keep yourGM vehicle allGM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks: Your vehicle hasan air bag system. Before att’emptingto do your own service work, see “ServicingYour Air Bag-Equipp’edPontiac” in theIndex. You should keepa record with all parts receipts and list the mileageand the dateof any service work you perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index, Delco

6-2 Adding Equipmentto the Outsideof Your Vehicle Things you might add to the outsideof your vehicle can You can be injured and your vehicle could be affect the airflow aroundit. This may cause wind noise damaged if you try to do service work on a and affect windshield washer performance. Checkwith vehicle without knowing enoughabout it. your Pontiac dealer before adding equipmentto the outside of your vehicle. Be sure you have sufficient knowledge, experience, the proper replacement parts Fuel and tools before youattempt any vehicle The 8th digitof your vehicle identificationnumber maintenance task. (VIN) shows the code letter foryour engine. You will Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and find theVIN at the.top left of your instrument panel. other fasteners. “English” and (‘metric” (See “Vehicle Identification Number” in the Index.) fasteners can be easily confused.If you use the wrong fasteners, partscan later break If you have the 3800 engine (VIN Code K), use regular unleaded gasoline rated at87 octane or higher. or fall off. You could behurt. If you have the 5.7L engine (VIN Code I?), use premium unleaded gasolinerated at 91 octane orhigher for best performance. You may use middle gradeor regular unleaded gasolines, but your vehiclemay not accelerate as well. At a minimum, the gasoline you use should meet If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission specifications ASTM D4814 in the United States and Standards (indicated on the underhoodtune-up label), it CGSB 3.5-M93 in Canada. Improved gasoline is designed to operateon fuels that meet California specifications have been developedby the American specifications. If such fuels arenot available in states Automobile Manufacturers Association (AAMA) for adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle better vehicle performance and engineprotection. will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal Gasolines meeting the AAMA specification could specifications, b’utemission controlsystem performance provide improved driveability and emission control may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on system protection compared to other gasolines, your instrument panel may turn on and/or your vehicle Be sure the posted octane for premium atis least may fail a smog-check test. If this occurs, returnto your 91 (at least 89 for middle grade and 87 for regular). authorized Pontiac dealer for diagnosisto determine the If the octane is lessthan 87, you may get a heavy cause of failure. In the event it is determinedthat the knocking noise when you drive. If it’s bad enough, cause of the condition is the type of fuels used, repairs it can damage your engine. may not be coveredby your warranty. If you’re using fuel rated at the recommended octane Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low or higher and you still hear heavy knocking, your emissions contain an sctane-enhancing additive called engine needs service. But dm9tworry if you hear a little methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT); pinging noise when you’re accelerating or driving up a ask your service station operator whether or not his fuel hill. That’s normal, and you don’t have to buy a higher contains MMT. General Motors does not recommend the octane fuelto get ridof pinging. It’s the heavy, constant use of such gasolines. If fuels containing MMT areused, knock that means you have a problem. spark plug lifemay be reduced and your emission control system performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized Pontiac dealer for service.

6-4 To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States Fuels in Foreign Countries are now required to containadditives that will help prevent deposits from formingin your engine and fuel If you plan on driving in another country outside the system, allowingyour emission control system to United States or Canada, the proper fuelmay be hard to function properly. Therefore, you should not have to add find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel n’ot anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines containing recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by reformulated gasolines may be availablein your area to your warranty. help clean the air. General Motorsrecommends that you To check on fuelavailability, ask an auto club, or use these gasolines if they comply with the contact a major oil companythat does business in the specifications described earlier. country where you’ll be driving. You can also write us at thefollowing address for NOTICE: advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that General Motors InternationalProduct Center contains methanol. Don’t use it. canIt corrode 1908 Colonel Sam Drive metal partsin your fuel system and also damage Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t be covered under your warranty.

6-5 Filling . - -r Tank

Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns violently, and that can cause verybad injuries. Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from gasoline.

L

The cap is behind a hinged door on the left side of your vehicle.

6-6 If you get gas0 le on yourself and then something ignites it, you could be badlyburned. Gasoline can spray outon you if you open the fuel filler cap too quickly.This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap slowly and wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill gasoline.Clean gasoline from While refueling,hang the cap inside the fuel door. painted surfaces assoon as possible. See “Cleaning To take off the cap, turn it slowly to the left the Outside of Your Pontiac” in the Index. (counterclockwise).

6-7 When you put the capback on, turn it to the right Checkinr Things Under the Hood (clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure you fully installthe cap. The diagnosticsystem can determineif the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuelto evaporate into the atmosphere. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the Index. An electric fan under the hood can start up and injure you even when the engine is not running, i Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any 1~ NOTICE: I underhood electric fan.

If you need a new cap, be sure to get the right type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit or have proper venting, and your fuel tank andemissions system might be damaged. Things that burn can get on hot engine parts a: start a fire. Theseinclude liquids like gasoline, oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshieldwasher and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine. Hood Release

Then go to the frontof the vehicle and pullup on the hood release. To open the hood, first pull the handle inside the vehicle.Lift thehood.

6-9 When you open the hood of the 3800 engine you’ll see:

A, Engine Coolant Reservoir E. Engine Fan I, Brake Fluid Reservoir B. Battery F. Windshield Washer Reservoir J. ClutchFluid Reservoir C. Oil Fill Cap G. Power Steering Reservoir (if equipped) D. Automatic Transmission H. Engine Oil Dipstick K. Air Cleaner Dipstick (if equipped) 6-10 When you open the hood of the 5.7L engine you'll see:

A

ti

A, Engine Coolant Reservoir F. Fan I. Brake Fluid Reservoir B. Power Steering Reservoir G. Windshield Washer Reservoir J. Clutch Fluid Reservoir C. Engine Oil Dipstick H. Automatic Transmission (if equipped) D. Battery Dipstick (if equipped) K. Air Cleaner E. Engine Oil Fill Cap Before closing the hood, be sure all thefiller caps It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you are on. get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle be level ground. Then just pull the hood down and closeit firmly. must on Engine Oil

LOW

Th,eengine oil dipstick is the yellow loop near the back of the engine. 5.7L Engine Oil Dipstick If the LOW OIL light on the instrument panel comes on, it means you need to check your engineoil level right away. For more information, see“Low Oil Light” in the Index. You should check your engineoil level regularly; this is an added reminder.

6- 12 3800 Engine

3800 L36 (Code K) Oil Dipstick Turn off the engine and give the oil a few minutes to drain back into the oilpan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick might not show the actual level. Checking Engine Oil Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level. 5.7L Engine When to Add Oil What Kind of Oil to Use If the oil is at or below theADD line, then you’ll Oils recommendedfor your vehicle canbe identified by need to add some oil. Butyou must use the right looking for the “Starburst” symbol.This symbol kind. This part explains what kindof oil to use, For indicates that the oil has been certifiedby the American crankcase capacity, see “Capacitiesand Specifications” Petroleum Institute(BPI). Do not use any oil which in the Index, does notcarry this Starburst symbol.

NOTICE: If you change your own oil, L be sure you use oil that has c theStarburst symbol on the Don’t add too muchoil. If your engine has P front of the oil container. If so much oil that the oil level gets above the you have your oil changed cross-hatched area thatshows the proper : for you, be sure the oil put operating range, your enginecould be damaged, ’ into your engine is b- American Pewoleurn P Institutecertified for Just fill it enough to put the level somewhere in the --- gasoline engines. proper operating range.Push the dipstick all theway I back in when you’re through. You should also use the proper viscosity oil your for vehicle, as shown in the following chart:

6-14 As shown in thechart, if you have the 5.7L engine, RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS SAE 5W-30 is best for your vehicle. However, you can FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST use SAE 1OW-30 if it’s going to be 0°F (-18°C) or SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE. above. These numbers on an oil containershow its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils, LOOK such as SAE 20W-50. HOT FOR THIS WEATHER- SYMBOL / 7 “F “C

4-100- + 38

+80- . +27

+60- . + 16

+40- +4

t 20 - -7

0- - 18

SAE SW-30 PREFERRED \ COLD WEATHER 00 NOT USE SAE 2OW-50 OR ANY OTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENOEO 5.7L Engine 6-15 As shown in the chart, if you have the 3800 engine, SAE RECl"ENDE0 SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS 1OW-30 is best for your vehicle. However, you can use FOR BEST FUELAND COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST SAE 5W-30 if it's going to be colder than 60°F (16OC) SAE VISCOSITY Gmmw= JL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE. before your next oil change. When it's very cold, you should use SAE 5W-30. These numbers on an oil LOOK container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use HOT FOR THIS other viscosity oils, such as SAE 2OW-50. WEATHER SYMBOL /

.. SAL SW-30

\ COLD WEATHER DO NOT USE SAE 2OW-50 OR ANY OTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED 3800 Engine 6-16 When to Change Engine Oil NOTICE: If any one of these is true for you, use the short tripkity maintenance schedule: Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum a Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines lvlost trips are less than5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km). This isparticularly important when outside ccStarburst”symbol. Failure to use the temperatures are below freezing. recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty. e Most trips include extensiveidling (such as frequent driving in stop-and-go traffic). e GM Goodwrench@oil meets allthe requirements for Most trips are through dusty areas. your vehicle. e You frequently tow a trailer oruse a carrier on topof If you are in an area where the temperature falls below your vehicle. -20°F (-29”C), consider using either an SAE 5W-30 a The vehicle isused for delivery service, police, taxi synthetic oil or an SAE OW-30 oil. Both will provide or other commercial application. easier cold starting and better protection for your engine Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to at extremely low temperatures. break down sooner. If any one of these istrue for your Engine Oil Additives vehicle, then you need to change youroil and filter every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months -- whichever Don’t add anything toyour oil. Your Pontiac dealer is occurs first. ready to advise if you think something should be added. If none of them is true, use the longtrip/highway maintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter every 7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months -- whichever occurs first. Drivinga vehicle with a fully warmed engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to break down slower. 6-17 What to Do with Used Oil Air Cleaner Did you know that used engine oil containscertain dements that may be unhealthy foryour skin and could even c’ausecancer? Don’t letused oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw away clothing or rags containing used engine oil. (See the manufacturer’s warnings about the use anddispusal of oil products.) Used oil can be a real threat to the environment, If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing oil from the filter beforedisposal. Don’t ever dispose of oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streamsor bodies of?water, Instead, recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a service station ora local recycling 3800 Engine center for help.

6-18 Operating the engine with theair cleaner off can cause you or others tobe burned. The air cleaner not only cleans theair, it stops flameif the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Don’t drive with it off, and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner off.

5.7L Engine I NOTICE: Refer to the Maintenance Schedule todetermine when to replace the air filter. If the air cleaner is off, a backfire can causea See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index. damaging enginefire. And, dirt can easily get into your engine, whichwill damage it. Always have theair cleaner in place when you’re driving.

6-19 Air Filter Replacement To remove the air filter:

I

2. Disconnect the plastic clamp on the duct. Pull apart the connection.

1. Remove the plastic pin by pulling it straight up.

6-20 3. Pull the air cleaner straight up. Unclamp the 4. Open the air cleaner and remove the filter. metal clips.

6-21 Automatic Transmission Fluid When to Check and Change 1 Vf\ a I IJ A good time to check your automatic transmissionfluid level is when the engine oil is changed. Change both the fluid and filter every 15,000 miles (25 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90”F (32”C) or higher.

0 In hilly or mountainous terrain.

0 Uses such as high performance operation. When doing frequent trailer towing. Uses such as foundin taxi, police or delivery service. If you have the 5.7L LT1 engine (with the WS6 option), If you do not use yourvehicle under any of these your air cleaner will be located over the radiator near the conditions, change the fluid and filter every front of the engine. 100,000 miles ( 166 000 km), To remove thefilter, remove the screws (located on the See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in theIndex. rear edge of the air cleaner), lift the aircleaner and remove the filter.

6-22 HQWto Check To get the right reading, thefluid should be at normal operating temperature, which is 180°F to Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may 200°F (82OC to 93°C). choose to have this done at your Pontiac dealership Service Department. Checking Transmission Fluid Hot If you do ityourself, be sure to follow all the instructions Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick. (24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F (10°C). If it's colder than 50°F (lO"C), drive the vehicle in DRIVE (D) until the engine temperature gage NOTICE: moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes. Then follow the hot check procedures. Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission. Too much can mean that someof Checking TransmissionFluid Cold the fluid could come out and fallon hot engine A cold check is made afterthe vehicle has been sitting parts or exhaust system parts, startinga fire. Be for eight hoursor more with the engineoff and is d sure to getan accurate reading if you check your only as a reference. Let the enginerun at idle for five transmission fluid. minutes if outside temperatures are50°F (10OC) or more. If it's colder than 50°F (lO"C), you may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid level be low Wait at least 30 minutes before checkingthe during a cold check, you must perform a hot check transmission fluid levelif you have beendriving: before adding fluid. This will give you a more accurate

When outside temperatures are above90 OF (32 O C). reading of the fluid level. At high speed for quite a while. In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather. While pulling a trailer.

6-23 Checking the Fluid Hot or Cold Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:

I) Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine running.

0 With the parking brake applied, placethe shift lever in PARK (P). With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift lever through each gear range, pausing for about three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P). Let the engine runat idle for three minutes or more.

3800 Engine Transmission Dipstick

6-24 I

5.7L LTl Engine Transmission Dipstick 5.7L Engine Transmission Dipstick 1. The transmission fluid handle is the red loop near the back of the engine. Pullout the dipstick and wipe it with a clean ragor paper towel. 2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and then pull it back out again. How to Add Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of transmission fluid touse. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. Add fluid onlyafter checking the transmission fluid HOT. (A COLD check is used only as a reference.) If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check. It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5 L). Dm’t ove ?l111. We reconramend you use only fluid 3800 Transmission Dipstick labeled BEXRON -111, because fluid with that label is made especially for your automatic transmission,Damage 3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower caused by fluid other than DEXRON-I11 is not covered level, The fluid levelmust be inthe COLD area for a by your new vehicle warranty. cold check or in theHOT area or ‘cross-hatched area After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as for a hot check. described under “How to Check.” 4, If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the dipstick back in all theway. dipstick back in allthe way.

6-26 Manual Transmission Fluid Check the fluid levelonly when your engine is off, the vehicle is parked on a level placeand the transmission is When to Check cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the transmission case. A good time to have it checked iswhen the engine oilis changed. However, the fluid in your manual Then, follow these steps: transmission doesn’t requirechanging. 1. Remove the filler plug. How to Check 2. Check that the lubricant levelis up to the bottom Because this operation can be difficult, you may of the filler plug hole. choose tohave this done at yourPontiac dealership 3. If the fluid level is good, install the plug and be sure Service Department. it is fully seated. If the fluid levelis low, add more fluid as described in the next steps. If you do ityourself, be sureto follow all the instructions here, or you could get a false reading. How to Add Fluid Here’s how to add fluid. Refer tothe Maintenance NOTICE: Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. Too much or too little fluid can damage your 1. Remove the filler plug. transmission. Too much ‘can mean that someof 2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only enough the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine fluid to bring the fluid level up to the bottom of parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be the filler plug hole. : sure to get an accurate reading if you check your I transmission fluid. 3. Install the filler plug. Be surethe plug is fully seated.

6-27 Hydraulic Clutch When to Check and What to Use The hydraulic clutch linkage inyour vehicle is self-adjusting. The clutch master cylinder reservoiris filled with hydraulic clutch fluid. It isn’t a good idea to “top off” your clutch fluid.Adding fluid won’t correct a leak. A fluid loss in this system could indicatea problem. Have the system inspected and repaired.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinehow ‘oftenyou should check the fluid level inyour clutch master cylin’der reservoir andfor the proper fluid,See “Owner Checksand Services” and “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” inthe Index.

The proper fluid shouldbe added if the levelis below the STEP mark on the reservoir,See the instructions on the reservoir cap.

6-28 Rear Axle Engine Coolant When to Check and Change Lubricant The cooling s stem in your vehicle is filled with new DEX-COOL 8engine coolant. This coolant designed is Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how to remain in your vehiclefor 5 years or 150,000 miles often to check thelubricant and when to change it. See (240 000 km) whichever occurs first, ifyou add only “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in theIndex. DEX-COOL’ extended life coolant. How to Check Lubricant The following explains yourcooling system and how to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, with engineoverheating or if you need to add coolant you’ll need to add some lubricant.Add enough lubricant to your radiator, see “EngineOverheating” in the Index. to raise the level tothe bottom of the filler plug hole, A 50150 mixture’of water and DEX-COOL@ What to Use coolant will: Standard Differential Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C). Use Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 12345977) or SAE Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C). 80W-90 GL-5 gear lubricant. Protect against rust and corrosion. Limited-Slip Differential e Help keep the proper engine temperature. To add lubricantwhen the level islow, use Axle Let the warning lights and gages work as Lubricant (GM Part No. 12345977). To completely refill they should. after draining, add 4 ounces(1 18 ml) of Limited-Slip Differential Lubricant Additive (GM PartNo. 1052358). Then fill to the bottom of the filler plug hole with Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 12345977). NOTICE: I When adding coolant,it is important thatyou Adding only plain water to your cooling system use only DEX-COOL@(silicate-free) c’oolant. can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other If silicated coolant is added tothe system, liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper premature engine, heater coreor radiator coolant mixwill. Your vehicle’s coolant warning corrosion may result. In addition, the engine system is set for the proper coolantmix. With coolant will require change sooner-- at plain water or the wrongmix, your engine could 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, get too hot but you wouldn’t get the overheat whichever occurs first, warning. Your engine could catch fire andyou or others could be burned.Use a 50J50 mix of clean What to Use water andDEX-COOL’coolant. Use a mixture of one-half ckan water (preferably distilled) and one-half DEX-COOL@coolant which won’t damage aluminumparts. If you use this mixture, you don’t need to add anything else.

6-30 Checking Coolant NOTICE:

If you use an improper coolant mix, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost wouldn’tbe covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mix can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four times a year, have your dealer check yourcooling system.

NOTICE: When your engine is cold, check the dipstick on the cap If you use the propercoolant, you don’t have to of the coolant recovery tank. The coolant level should add extrainhibitors or additives which claimto be at COLD, or a littlehigher. When your engineis improve the system. These can be harmful. warm, the levelon the dipstick should be up to HOT, or a littlehigher.

6-31 If this lightcomes on, it means you’re low on engine coolant. Turning the raalator pressure cap when the engine and radiator arehot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly. With the coolant recovery tank, you will almost never have to add coolant at the radiator. Never turn the pressure cap -- even a little -- when the engine and radiator arehot, 5.7L Engine Only

Adding Coolant to the Recovery Tank Add coolant mixture atthe recovery tank, but be careful If you need more coolant, add the properDEX-COOL@ not to spill it. coolant mixtureat the coolant recovery tank, but only when your engineis cool. If the tank is very low or empty, also add coolant to theradiator. See “Engine Overheating” in the Indexfor information. You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the engine parts are hot , enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine. I

6-32 Radiator Pressure Cap(All Engines) Power- Steering Fluid I NOTICE: Your radiator capis an 18 psi (124 kPa) pressure-type cap and must be tightly installedto prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage from overheating.Be sure the arrowson the cap line up with the overflow tube on the radiator filler neck.

When you replace your radiator pressure cap,an AC@ cap is recommended.

Thermostat 3800 Engine Engine coolant temperature is controlledby a thermostat in the engine coolant system. The thermostatstops the When to Check Power SteeringFluid flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant It is not necessary to regularly check power steering reaches a preset temperature. fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or When you replace yourthermostat, an AC@thermostat you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system is recommended. could indicatea problem. Havethe system inspected and repaired.

6-33 5.7L Engine When the engine compartmentis hot, the level How To Check Power Steering Fluid should be at the H or HOT mark. When the engine compartmentis cool, wipe the capand When the engine compartment iscool, the level the topof the reservoir clean, thenunscrew the capand should be at C or FULL COLD m’ark. wipe the dipstickwith a clean rag. Replace the capand What to Use completely tighten it. Then remove the cap again and look at thefluid level on the dipstick. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use. See “Recommended Fluidsand The level should be the FULL COLD mark. at If Lubricants” in the Index. Always use the proper fluid. necessary, add only enoughfluid to bringthe level up Failure to use the proper fluidcan cause leaks and to the mark. damage hoses and seals,

6-34 Windshield Washer Fluid NOTICE: What toUse When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read When using concentrated washer fluid, the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be follow the manufacturer’s instructions for operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature adding water. may fall below freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer protection against freezing. fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze Adding Washer Fluid and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system. Also, water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid. Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters full when it’s very cold.This allows for expansion if freezingoccurs, which coulddamage the tank if it is completely full. Don’t use radiator antifreeze in your windshield washer.It can damage your washer system and paint.

Open the cap labeledWASHER FLUID ONLY. Add washer fluid until the tank is full. 6-35 of the brake system. If it is, you should have your brake Brakes system fixed, sincea leak means that sooner or later your Brake Fluid brakes won’t work well,or won’t work at all. So, it isn’t a good idea to “topoff’ your brakefluid. Adding brake fluidwon’t correct a leak. If you add fluid when your linings are worn, then you’llhave too much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only whenwork is done on the brakehydrwlic system.

If you have too much brake fluid,it can spill on the engine. Thefluid will burn ifthe engine is hot enough.You ‘orothers could be burned, and your vehicle couldbe damaged. Add brake fluid onlywhen work is done on the brake Your brake master cylinder reservoiris here. It is filled with DOT-3 brake fluid. hydraulic system. There are only two reasons whythe brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine when to goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake check your brake fluid.See “Periodic Maintenance lining wear, When new linings are put in, the fluidlevel Inspections” in the Index. goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out

6-36 Checking Brake Fluid What to Add When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3

brake fluid -- such as Delco Supreme 11@ (GM Part No. 12377967). Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only. Always clean thebrake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it. This will help keep dirt from enteringthe reservoir.

With the wrong kindof fluid in your brake system, your brakesmay not work well,or they may not even work atall. This could causea You can check the brake fluid without takingoff the cap. crash. Always use the proper brake fluid. Just look at the brake fluid reservoir.The fluid level should be above the plastic seamin the reservoir. If it isn’t, have your brake system checkedto see if there is a leak. After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, make sure the level is above the plastic seam, near the base of the filler neck.

6-37 Brake Wear NOTICE: Unless you have the four-wheel disc brake option, your Pontiac has front disc brakes and rear drum brakes. Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake system parts. For example, just a few Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine make ahigh-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound oil, in your brake system can damage brake may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle system parts so badly that they’ll have to be is moving (except when you are pushing on the brake replaced. Don’t let someoneput in the pedal firmly). wrong kind of fluid. 0 If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s I painted surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If you do, washit The brake wear warning sound means that soon off immediately. See“Appearance Care’’ your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to in the Index. an accident. Whenyou hear the brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.

6-38 Brake linings should always be replaced as complete NOTICE: axle sets. See “Brake System Inspection” in Section 7 of this Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads manual under Part C “Periodic Maintenance could result in costly brake repair. Inspections”. Brake Pedal Travel Same driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes are. first applied or lightly See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to applied. This does not mean something is wrong with normal height, orif there is a rapid increase in pedal your brakes. travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble. See “Caliper/Knuckle Maintenance Inspection’’ in Brake Adjustment Section 7 of this manual under Part C “Periodic Every timeyou make a moderate brakestop, your disc Maintenance Inspections.” brakes adjust for wear. If you rarely make a moderate or If you have rear drum brakes, they don’t have wear heavier stop, then your brakes might notadjust correctly. indicators, but if you ever heara rear brake rubbing If you drive in that way, then -- very carefully -- make noise, have therear brake linings inspected.Also, the a few moderatebrake stops about every1,000 miles rear brake drums should be removed and inspected each (1 600 km), so your brakes will adjust properly. time the tires are removed for rotation or changing. If your brake pedal goes down farther than normal, your When you have the front brakes replaced, have the rear rear drum brakes may need adjustment.Adjust them by brakes inspected, too. backing up and firmly applying thebrakes a few times.

6-39 Replacing Brake System Parts Vehicle Storage The braking system ona modern vehicleis complex. Its If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for25 days many parts have tobe of top quality andwork well or more, take off the black, negative(-) cable from together if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. the battery. This will help keep your battery from Vehicles we design and test have top-qualityGM brake running down. parts in them, as your Pontiac does whenit is new. When you replace partsof your braking system-- for example, when your brake liningswear down and you have to have new ones put in -- be sure you get new genuine GM replacement parts.If you don’t, your brakes may no longer workproperly. For example,if Batteries have acid thatcan burn you and gas someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you vehicle, the balance betweenyour front and rear brakes aren’t careful. See‘‘Jump Starting” inthe Index can change -- for the worse. The braking performance for tips on working around a battery without you’ve cometo expect can change in many other ways if getting hurt. someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts. I 1 Battery Contact your dealer to learnhow to prepare your vehicle for longer storage periods. Every new Pontiac has a Delco Freedom@battery. You never have to add waterto one of these. When it’s time Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent for a new battery, we recommend a Delco Freedom Feature” in the Index. battery. Get one that has the replacementnumber shown on the original battery’s label.

6-40 Bulb Replacement Headlamps For the proper type of replacement bulb, see To replace a headlamp: “Replacement Bulbs” in the Index. 1. Open the headlamp door by hand. See “Headlamp Halogen Bulbs Doors” in the Index.

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if you dropor scratch the bulb.You or others couldbe injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

2. Unscrew the bezel with a screwdriver and remove it.

6-41 I II\ kk!r e-L

Lt ,;I ,

3. Remove the screws and pull out the bulb housing. 4. Full out the bulband Idisconnectthe electrical connector. 5. Reverse the steps with a new bulb.

6-42 Front Turn Signal

2. Turn and pull out the socket and the bulb. 3. Pull out the bulb. 1. Using a screwdriver, remove the plastic screws from the deflector under the vehicle. Move the deflector 4. Reverse the steps with a new bulb. out of the way.

6-43 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp

2. Gently pull the assembly out and remove the bulb from the back of the assembly. To replace thebulb: 3. Reverse the steps with a new bulb. 1. Remove the two screws in the stoplamp lens.

6-44 Rear Lamps To change any rear bulb, you have to remove the entire housing. 1. Remove the trim panel from the side that you are replacing the bulb. 2. Pull the carpet back.

4. Pull off the assembly from the outside. 5. To remove a socket with a tab, press the tab and turn the socket counterclockwise. To remove a socket without a tab, turn the socket counterclockwise. 6. To remove the bulb, push in and turn it counterclockwise, then pull it out. 7. Reverse the steps with a new bulb. 3. Remove the wing nuts.

6-45 Rear Sid ~ rker

3. Turn counterclockwise and pull out the socket and the bulb. To replace a rear sidemarker bulb: 4. Pull out the bulb. 1. Remove the screw from the sidemarker assembly. 5. Reverse the steps with a new bulb. 2. To pull out the bulb housing, tilt the housing to remove thetabbed end.

6-46 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Wiper Blade Element Replacement

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are To replace the wiper blade element, referto the wiper removed in differentways. blade assembly replacement instructions. To replace the To remove the wiper blade assembly: element, follow these steps: 1. Lift the wiperarm until it locks into an '. . Locate the heel end of the wiper blade assembly that upright position. has the two notches held by the wiper blade claw. 2. Press the locking tab down while sliding the blade assembly down.

6-47 Hold the wiper blade assemblywith one hand and To check the aim, the vehicle should be properly pull the element gently with the otherhand. prepared as follows: (Replacement blade elements havethree plastic caps a The vehicle must havea11 four tires on a! perfectly which retain two metal flexor strips. not remove Do level surface. these caps before the elementis installed.) The vehicle should not have any snow,ice or mud At heel endof the bladeassembly, notched end 3. the attached tu it. of blade element last, slide the blade element into the blade claw sets.The plastic retainer caps will be There should notbe any ‘cargoor loading of the forced off as the element is fully inserted. Make sure vehicle, exceptit should havea full tank of gas and that all the claw setsare properly engaged inthe one person or 160 lbs. (75 kg) on the driver’s seat. slots of the blade element. e Tires should be properly inflated. 4. Install wiper blade assembly on wiper arm. The horizontal indicator should read “0.” For informationon windshield wiper blade replacement type and length, see “Capacities and Specifications” in the Index. NOTICE:

Headlamp Aiming To make sure your headlamps are aimed Your vehicle has the headlamp system. These headlamps properly, read all the instructions before have horizontal and vertical aim indicators. Theaim beginning. Failure to follow th’eseinstructions has been pre-set at the factory and should needno could cause damage to headlamp parts. further adjustment. If your vehicle is damaged in an accident and the State inspectionstations will allow a vertical reading of headlamp aim seems to beaffected, see your Pontiac plus 0.76 degrees or minus 0.76 degrees fr0m the center dealer. Headlmps ondamaged vehicles may require of the bubble. recalibration of the horizontal aim by your Pontiac dealer.

6-48 It is recommended that the upper limit not exceed plus 0.4 degrees from the centerof the bubble. Other drivers CAUTION: (Continued, may flash their high beams atyou if your adjustment is much above plus0.4 degrees. 0 Underinflated tires pose the same darlger as overloaded tires. The resulting accident Tires could cause serious injury. Check all tires Your new Pontiac comes with high-quality tires made frequently to maintain the recommended by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have pressure. Tire pressure should be checked questions about your tirewarranty and where to obtain when your tires are cold. service, see yourPontiac Warranty booklet for details. Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut, punctured or broken by a sudden

impact -9 such as when you hit a pothole. Keep tires at the recommended pressure. Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your Pa - - ly maintained andimp1 ,derly L,Ld tires tread is badly worn, or if your tireshave are dangerous. been damaged, replace them. Overloading your tires can cause overheating See “Inflation -- Tire Pressure” in this section as a result of too much friction.You could have for inflation pressure adjustment forhigher an air-out and a serious accident. See “Loading speed driving. Your Vehicle” in the Index. CAUTION: (Continued)

6-49 Inflation -- Tire Pressure NOTICE: The Tire-Loading Information label, which is on the driver’s door, shows the correct inflation pressures for Don’t let anyonetell you that underinflation your tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means your vehicle or has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no overinflation is all right. It’s not.If your tires more than 1 mile ( 1.6 km). don’t have enough air (underinflation),you can get thefollowing: If you’ll be driving at speeds higher than 100 mph (160 kdh) where it is legal, raise the cold inflation Too much flexing pressure of each tire to 35 psi (240 kPa). When you 0 Too much heat end this very high-speed driving, reducethe cold 0 Tireoverloading inflation pressures to those listed on the Tire-Loading 0 Badwear Information label. 0 Bad handling 0 B,ad fuel economy. If your tires have too much air (overinflation), you can get thefollowing: 0 Unusualwear 0 Bad handling Rough ride 0 Needless damage from road hazards.

6-50 When to Check The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first Check your tires once a month or more. rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled uon’t forget your compact sparetire. It should be at Maintenance Services” in the Index for scheduled 60 psi (420 kPa). rotation intervals. How to Check Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they’re underinflated. Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture. Tire Inspection and Rotation Tires should be rotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles (10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual If you don’t have P245/5OZR16 or P275/40ZR17 wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check Goodyear Eagle GS-C tires, use the rotation pattern wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or shown above for your tires. wheels. See “When It’s Time for New Tires” and “Wheel Replacement’’ later in this section for more information.

6-51 Don’t include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation. After the tireshave been rotated, adjustthe front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire-Loading Information label. Makecertain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque”in the Index.

I Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the pa; cJ to which it is fastened,can make wheel nuts become loose after a time. The wheel could comeoff and caus’e If you have P245/50ZRl6 or P27940ZR17 Goodyear an accident. When you change a wheel, remove Eagle GS-C tires, they must roll in a certain direction any rust or dirt frolmplaces where the wheel for the best overall performance. The direction is shown by an arrow on the sidewall. Because these tires are attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can directional, they should be rotated as shown here. These use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be tires should only be moved from frontto rear and rear to sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you front on the same side of the vehicle. need to,to get all the rust or dirt off. (See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.)

6-52 When It’s Time for New Tires 0 The tire has a bump, bulge or split. One way to tell when it’s The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that time for new tires is to can’t be repaired well because of the size or location check the treadwear of the damage. indicators, which will Buying New Tires appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at less of tread remaining. the Tire-Loading Information label. The tires installed on yourvehicle when it was new had a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires, get ones with that same TPCSpec number. That way your vehicle will continue to havetires that are designed to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating, You need a new tire if any of the following statements traction, ride and other things during normal service on are true: your vehicle. If your tires have anall-season tread 0 You can see the indicators at three or more places design, the TPC number will be followedby an “MS” around the tire. (for mud and snow).

0 You can see cord or fabric showing through the If you ever replace your tires with those not having a tire’s rubber. TPC Spec number, make surethey are the same size, load range, speed rating and construction type (bias, 0 The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep bias-belted or radial) as youroriginal tires. enough to show cordor fabric. car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), Mixing tires could causeyou to lose control while or to somelirnited-pro'duction tires. driving. If you mix tires of dif€erentsizes or types While the tires available on General Motors passenger (radi,al bias-belted tires), vehicle not and the may cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these handle properly, andyou could have a crash. grades, they must also conform to Federal safety Using tires of different sizesmay also cause requirements and additional General MotorsTire damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same performance Criteria (TPC) standards. size and type tires on all wheels. It's all right to drive with your compact spare, Treadwear though. It was developed for use0n your vehicle. The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For Uniform Tire Quality Grading example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half The following information relates to the system (1 1/2) times as well on the gov'esnrnent course as a tire developed by the United States National Highway graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and treadwear, traction and temperature performance, (This may depart significantly from the norm due to variations applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.) The in driving habits, service practicesand differences in grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger road characteristics and climate.

6-54 Traction -- A, B, C Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are A, B, laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and established for a tire that is properly inflated and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or performance. excessive loading,either separately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straightahead) traction tests and does not Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance include cornering (turning) traction. The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced Temperature -- A, B, C carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance. The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance tothe generation of Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or controlled conditions ona specified indoor laboratory your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and vibrating when driving on a smooth road,your wheels excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. may need to be rebalanced. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger cartires must meet under the Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keepcoming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheelbolts wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous. wheels, which can sometimesbe repaired). See your It could affectthe braking and handling of your Pontiac dealer if any of these conditions exist. vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need. lose control. You could have a collision in which Each new wheel should havethe same load-carrying you or others could beinjured. Always use the capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the correct wheel, wheel boltsand wheel nuts for same way as the oneit replaces. replacement. If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace themonly with new CM original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the rightwheel, wheel. bolts and wheel nuts for NOTICE: your Pontiac model. ~ The wrongwheel can also cause problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis.

See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for more information.

6-56 Used Replacement Wheels Tire Chains

NOTICE:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is If your Pontiac has P235/55R16, P245/50ZR16or dangerous. You can’t know howit’s been used or P275/40ZR17 size tires, don’t use tire chains. how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly They can damage yourvehicle. and cause an accident.If you have to replacea If you have other tires, use tire chainsonly where wheel, use a new GM original equipmentwheel. legal and only when you must. onlyUse SAE Class “S” type chains that are the propersize for your tires. Install them on the rear tires and tighten themas tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened. Driveslowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions.If you can hear the chains contacting yourvehicle, stop and retighten them.If the contact continues, slow down untilit stops. Driving too fastor spinning thewheels with chainson will damage your vehicle.

6-57 Appearance Care Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle: Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are tuxic. Others can burst intoflame if you strike a 0 Alcohol match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are Laundry Soap dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space, Bleach When you use anything from a container to clean your Pontiac, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings 0 Reducing Agents and instructions. And always open your doors ‘or Cleaning the Inside of Pontiac windows when you’re cleaning the inside. Your Use avacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose Never use these to clean yourvehicle: dirt. Wipe vinyl or leather with a clean, damp cloth. 0 Gasoline Your Pontiac dealer has two cleaners, a solvent-type 0 Benzene spot lifter and a foam-type powderedcleaner. They will clean normal spots and stains very well. Do not use 0 Naphtha them on vinyl or leather. Carbon Tetrachloride Here are some cleaningtips: Acetone 1. Always read the instructions on the cleaner label. Paint Thinner 2. Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set. 0 Turpentine 3. Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean area Lacquer Thinner often, A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn. 4. Use solvent-type cleaners in a well-ventilated area 0 Nail Polish Remover only. If YOU use them, don’t saturate the stained area. They can all be hazardous -- some more than 5. If a ring forms after spot cleaning, clean the entire others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too. area immediately or it will set.

6-58 Using Foam-Type Cleaner on Fabric If you need to use a solvent: 1. Vacuum and brush the area to removeany loose dirt. 1. Gently scrape excess soil fromthe trim material with a clean, dull knife orscraper. 2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask surrounding trim along stitch orwelt lines. 2. Use very little cleaner, light pressure and clean cloths (preferably cheesecloth). Cleaning should start at the 3. Mix Multi-Purpose Powdered Cleaner following the outside of the stain, “feathering” toward thecenter. directions on the container label. 3. Keep changing to a clean section of the cloth. 4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge. Don’t 4. When you clean a stain from fabric, immediately saturate the material and don’t rub it roughly. dry the area with a blow dryer to help prevent a 5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge cleaning ring. to remove the suds. Special Cleaning Problems 6. Rinse the section with a clean, wet sponge. 7. Wipe off what’s left with a slightly damp paper towel Greasy or Oily Stains or cloth. Stains caused by grease, oil, butter, margarine, sho’e 8. Dry it immediately with a blow dryer. polish, coffee with cream, chewing gum, cosmetic creams, vegetable oils, wax crayon, tar and asphalt can 9. Wipe with a clean cloth. be removed as follows: Using Solvent-Type Cleaneron Fabric 1. Carefully scrape off excess stain. First, see if you have to use solvent-type cleaner at all. 2. Follow the solvent-type instructions described earlier. Some spots and stains will clean off better with just Shoe polish, wax crayon, tar and asphalt will stain if left water and mild soap. on a vehicle’s seat fabric. Theyshould be removed as soon as possible. Be careful, because the cleaner wiIl dissolve them and may cause them to spread.

6-59 Non-Greasy Stains Cleaning 'Vinyl Stains caused by catsup, coffee (black), egg, fruit, fruit Use warm water and a clean cloth. juice, milk, softdrinks, wine, vomit, urineand blood can 0 Rub with a clean, damp cloth to removedirt. You be removed as follows: may have to do it more than once. 1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the 0 Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain soiled area with coolwater. if you don't get them off quickly. Use a clean 2. If a stain remains, follow the foam-type instructions cloth and a vinylfleather cleaner.See your dealer described earlier. for this product. 3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomitor urine, Cleaning Leather treat thearea with a waterhaking soda solution: 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 m~l) Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water anda mild soap or of lukewarm water. saddle soap and wipedry with a soft cloth. Then, let the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry. 4. If needed, clean lightly with solvent-typecleaner. a For stubborn stains, usea leather cleaner.See your Combination Stains dealer for this product. Stains causedby candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili 0 Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive sauce and unknown stains canbe removed as follows: cleaners, furniture polishor'shoe polish on leather. i. Carefully scrape off excess stain. 0 Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the 2. Clean with cool water and allow todry. finish, it can harm the leather, 3. If a stain remains, cleanit with solvent-type cleaner.

6-60 Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel Glass Use only mild soap and waterto clean the top surfaces Glass shouldbe cleaned often.GM Glass Cleaner (GM of the instrumentpanel. Sprays containing silicones or Part No. 1050427) or a liquid household glasscleaner waxes may cause annoying reflectionsin the windshield will remove normal tobaccosmoke and dust films on and even makeit difficult to see through the windshield interior glass. under certain conditions. Don't use abrasive cleaners on glass, becausethey may Care of Safety Belts cause scratches.Avoid placing decals onthe inside rear window, since they may have to bescraped off later. If Keep belts clean anddry. abrasive cleaners areused on the insideof the rear window, an electric defogger elementmay be damaged. Any temporary license shouldnot be attached across the defogger grid.

Do notbleach or dye sal belts. 1 v'ou do, it may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

6-61 Cleaning theOutside of the Weatherstrips Windshield an’dWiper B’lades Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last If the windshield isnot clear after using the windshield longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, silicone greasewith a clean cloth at least every six wax, sap or other materialmay be on the bladeor months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent windshield. application may be required. (See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.) Clean the outside of the windshield with GM Windshield Cleaner, Bon Ami’ Powder (non-scratching glass Cleaning a Removable Roof Panel cleaning powder), GM No. 1050011. The Part Special care is necessary when cleaning, removing windshield is clean if beads do not form when you and/or storing the roof panel. rinse it with water. Flush with water to remove dust and dirt, then dry Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades the panel. and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength Clean the panel with GM Glass Cleaner. Leave the windshield washer solvent. Then rinsethe blade with cleaner on the panel forone minute, then wipe the water. panel with a soft, lint-free cloth. Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary; Don’t use abrasive cleaning materials. replace blades that look worn.

6-62 Cleaning the Outsideof Your Pontiac Your Pontiac has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes of color, gloss retention and durability. that are non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat Washing Your Vehicle paint finish. The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water. NOTICE: Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun. Don’t use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Use Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on liquid hand, dish or car washing (mild detergent) soaps. a basecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay dull the Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or finish or leave swirl marks. that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., surface scratches and water spotting. can damageyour vehicle’s finish if they remain on High pressure car washes may cause water to enter painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. your vehicle. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleanersthat are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter. Finish Care Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your Pontiac by and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a perioc 1 hand may be necessary to remove residue fromthe paint of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products new by keeping your Pontiac garaged or covered from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” whenever possible. in the Index.) 6-63 Cleaning Your Convertible Top Aluminum or Chrome Wheels Your c’onvertibletop should be cleaned often. If you use (I€ Equipped) an automatic car wash, use one with water jets and Keep your wheels clean using a soft cleancloth with hanging cloths. High pressure car washes may cause mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After water to enter yourvehicle. rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax When you hand wash the top, do it in partial shade. Use may then be applied. a mild soap, lukewarm water and a soft sponge, A The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted chamois or cloth may leave linton the top, and a brush surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps, can chafe the threads in the top fabric.Don’t use chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleanersor detergents, harsh cleaners, solvents orbleaching agents. abrasive cleaning brushes onthem because you could When you clean the top, put one hand under it to damage the surface. You may use chrome polish on support it. Wet the entire vehicle and wash the top chrome wheels, but avoid any painted surface of the evenly to avoid spots or rings. Let the soap remain on wheel, and buff off immediately after application. the fabric for a few minutes. When the top is really Don’t take your vehicle throughan automatic carwash dirty, use a mild foam-type cleaner. Thoroughly rinse that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These the entire vehicle, then let the top dry in direct sunlight. brushes can also damagethe surface of these wheels. To protect the convertible top: After you wash the vehicle, make sure the top is completely dry before you lower it. Don’t get any cleaner on the vehicle’s painted finish; it could leave streaks. ~f YOU decide to go through an automatic car wash, ask the manager if the equipmentcould damage your top. 6-64 Tires Sheet Metal Damage To clean your tires, usea stiff brush with a tire cleaner. If your vehicle is damagedand requires sheetmetal repair or replacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosion material to the partsrepaired or NOTICE: replaced to restore corrosion protection.

When applying a tire dressing always take care to Finish Damage wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted Any stone chips, fractures or deepscratches in the finish surfaces on the bodyor wheels of the vehicle. should be repaired rightaway. Bare metalwill corrode Petroleum-based products may damage the quickly and may develop into a major repair expense. paint finish. Minor chips and scratches can be repairedwith touch-up materials available from your dealer otheror service outlets. Larger areasof finish damagecan be corrected in your dealer's body and paint shop. Underbody Maintenance Chenf ea1 Paint Spotting Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust Some weather and atmospheric conditionscan create a control can collecton the underbody. If these arenot chemical fallout, Airborne pollutants can fall upon and removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on the attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped exhaust system even though they have corrosion discolorations, and ,mall irregular .dark spots etched into protection. the paint surface. At least every spring, flush thesematerials from the Although no defect in the paint job causes this, Pontiac underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud will repair, at no charge to the owner,the surfaces of and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within of the frame should be loosened before being flushed. 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase, Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do whichever occurs first. this for you.

6-66 Appearance Care Materials Chart

PART NUMBER SIZE DESCRIPTION USAGE 994954 23 in. x 25 in. Polishing Cloth- Wax Treated Exterior Polish - 1050004 2.75 sq. ft. Shines vehicle without scratching Chamois 1050172 16 oz. (0.473 L) Tar and Road Oil Remover Also removes old waxes and polishes 10501 73 oz. (0.473 L) Chrome Cleaner and Polish 16 Removes rust and corrosion 1050 174 16 02. (0.473 L) White Sidewall Tire Cleaner Removes soil and black marks 1050200 1 gal. (3.785 L) Magic Mirror Cleaner Polish Exterior cleaner and polish ~ 1050214 32 oz. (0.946 L) Vinyl Cleaner Spot and stain removal I050427 oz. (0.680 L) Glass Cleaner 23 Cleans grease, grime and smoke film 1052870 02. (0.473 L) Wash and Wax Concentrate 16 Exterior wash

1052918** 8 oz. (0.237 L) Armor All TM Protector Protects vinyl, leather and rubber 1052925 16 02. (0.473 L) Cleans vinyl, cloth, tires and mats Multi-Purpose Powdered Cleaner 1052929 16 oz. (0.473 L) Wheel Cleaner Spray on wheel cleaner 1052930 8 oz. (0.237 L) Capture Dry Spot Remover Attracts and absorbs soils

12345002** 16 oz. (0.473 L) Armor All TM Cleaner Cleans vinyl, leather and rubber 12345725 12 oz. (0.354 L) Silicone Tire Shine Shines tires 12377964 16 02. (0.473 L) Cleaning Wax Protects finish and removesfine scratches 12377966 16 oz. (0.473 L) Finish Enhancer Spot cleans paint and gives high luster See your General Motors Parts Department for these products. *‘N Not recommended for use on instrument panel vinyl. See “Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.

6-67 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) the model designation, paint information and a list of all producti’onoptions and special equipment. Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle. ENGINE/1997 T \ ASSEMBLY Electrical System I CODE MODEL YEAR PLANT Add-on Electrical Equipment This is the legal identifierfor your Pontiac. It appearson a plate in the front cornerof the instrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can seeit if you look through the NOTICE: windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts Don’t add anything electrical to yourPontiac labels and the certificates of title and registration. unless you check with your dealer first.Some Engine Identification electrical equipment can damageyour vehicle and the damage wouldn’t be coveredby your warranty. The 8th character inyour VIN is the engine code. This Some add-on electrical equipment can keepother code will help you identify your engine, specifications components from working as they should. and replacement parts.

Service Parts IdentificationLabel Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to You’ll find this label located on the driver’s door side. add anything electrical to your Pontiac, see “Servicing It’s very helpful if you ever needto order parts. On this Your Air Bag-Equipped Pontiac”in the Index. label is: your VIN, 6-68 Headlamps Fuses and Circuit Breakers The headlampwiring is protected bya circuit breaker. An electrical overloadwill cause the lamps togo on and off, or in some cases to remainoff. If this happens, have your headlamp wiring checked rightaway. Windshield Wipers The windshield wiper motor is protectedby a circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due h'eavyto snow, etc., thewiper will stop untilthe motor cools. If the overload is caused by some electricalproblem and not snow, etc., be sure to getit fixed. Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other power accessories. Whenthe current loadis too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes, protectingthe The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from circuit until the problem is fixed or goesaway. short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers and fusible thermal links in the wiring itself. This greatly reduces the chanceof fires caused by electrical problems. There are two fuse centerson your vehicle. Oneis in the left sideof your instrument panel. Main Fuse Block

\ FUSE USAGE CHART In211 3~ 4~3 STOP/#AZARD TURN 6-U PCMBATT RADIO ACCY

5116~ 7nen TAIL LTSTAIL HVAC PWR ACCY COURTESY

9m100 1111 12)l GAGES AIRClGARiACCY BAG DEFOG/SEATS

QIGN 13n 14)) PGM IGN WlPERiWASH BATT WINDOWS

160I7 170 IP DIMMER ACCY RADIOACCY DIMMER IP SEE OWNER’S MANUAL FOR MORE INFORMATION PRINTED IN U.S.A 10281550

The other is in the enginecompartment. Open the cover Fuse Usage on either of the boxes to expose the €uses. STOP/HAZARB Hazard,Flasher, Brake Look at thesilver-colored band inside the fuse. If the Switch Assembly band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure you TURN B-U Traction ControlJ2nd Gear Start replace a bad fuse with a new one of the correct size. Switch, Back-up Lamp Switch, If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have a Turn Flasher, Daytime Running spare €use, youcan “borrow” one. Just pick some Lamps (DRL) Module feature of your car thatyou can get along without -- like PCM BATT Powertrain Control Module the radio or cigarette lighter -- and use its fuse,if it is (PCM), Fuel Pump Relay the size you need. Replace it as soon as you can. RADIO ACCY Delco Audyssey Radio Amplifier, Power Antenna, Remote CD Player (trunk) 6-70 Fuse Usage Fuse Usage TAIL LTS Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) PCM IGN Powertrain ControlModule Module, HeadlampSwitch (PCM), EVAP Canister Purge HVAC Selector Switch, Rear Defogger Vacuum Switch, EVAP Canister SwitchITimer Purge Valve, Transmission PWR ACCY Park Lamp Relay, Hatch Release WIPERIWASH Wiper Motor Assembly, Relay, Power Mirror Switch, Wipermasher Switch Radio, Shock Sensor, WINDOWS Power Windows Switch (RH, LH), Instrument Cluster Express-Down Module, Coolant COURTESY Body Control Module (BCM) Level Latching Module, Convertible Top Switch GAGES Body Control Module (BCM), Brake Switch Assembly (BTSI), I/P DIMMER Door Illumination Lamp (RH, Instrument Cluster, Daytime LH), Headlamp Switch, Fog Lamp Running Lamps (DRL) Module Switch, Instrument Cluster, HVAC Control Assembly, PRNDL AIR BAG Diagnostic Energy Reserve Illumination Lamp, Ashtray Module (DERM), Dual Pole Lamp, Radio, Steering Wheel Arming Sensor Controls-Radio, Rear Window CIGARIACCY Cigar Lighter, Data Link Defogger Switch/Timer, Traction Connector (DLC), Auxiliary Control Switch (TCS) and 2nd Accessory Wire Gear Start Switch DEFOG/SEATS Rear Defogger Switch/Timer, RADIO Body Control Module (BCM), Rear Defogger Timer/Relay, Radio, Amplifier, Steering Wheel Power Seats Controls-Radio

6-71 Underhood Electrical Center Fuse Usage ABS BAT (5A) Electronic Brake Control Module AIR PUMPFAN (25A) AIR Pump (V8) Relay, Pump, Bleed Valve and Cooling Fan HORN (20A) Horn Relay INJECTOR (15A) Fuel Injectors ENG SEN (20A) Mass Airflow, Heated Oxygen Sensor, Reverse Fuse Usage Lockout Solenoid, Skip ABS IGN (SA) Anti-Lock Brake System Shift Solenoid, Automatic Transmission, Brake ACTUATORS (15A) Daytime RunningLamp Switch Module, Headlamp Switch, Cooling Fan IGNITION (1OA) V6 VIN K: Electronic Relay, Exhaust, Gas Ignition ModuleVS Recirculation, EVAP VIN P: Ignition Coil Canister Purge Solenoid Module, Crankshaft Position Sensor. R HDLP DR (154 Headlamp Door Module A/C-CRUISE(15A) Air Conditioning L HDLP DR (1 5A) Headlamp Door Module Compressor Relay; ABS VLV (20A) Brake PressureValve Cruise Control Switches and Module

6-72 Relay Usage Capacities and Specifications B Air Conditioning Compressor Engine C Anti-Lock Brake SystedTraction Control Type System (TCS) VIN Engine Code K ...... V6 D Cooling Fan 1 VIN Engine Code P . . * . , . e. . V8 E AIR Pump Fuel Delivery ...... Fuel Injection F Cooling Fan 2 Valve Arrangement ...... , . . . . In-Head G Not Used Piston Displacement VIN Engine Code K , ,231 CID (3800) H Fog Lamps . . . . VIN Engine Code P . . . . . , , . 350 CID (5.7L) J Cooling Fan 3 Firing Order Replacement Bulbs VIN Engine Code K . . . , . . 1-6-5-4-3-2 VIN Engine Code P . .... 1-8-4-3-6-5-7-2 Back-up ...... 1156 Wheel Nut Torque ...... 100 lb-ft (140 N-m) Center High-Mounted Stoplamp . . e.* . . 921 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Front Parking and Turn Signal ...... 3157K Type ...... hook Headlamp ...... H-6545 Length ...... 24 inches (610 mm) Sidemarker . . , ...... 194

Tail Only ...... , ...... 194 Tail/Stop/Turn ...... 2057 Capacities (Approximate) Crankcase The following approximate capacities are given in Oil and Filter Change English. and metric conversions. Please refer to 3800 (VIN K) ...... 4.5 quarts (4.3 L)** “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index 5.7L (VIN P ) ...... 5.0 quarts (4.7 L)** for more information. Fuel Tank ...... 15.5 gallons (58.7L) Air Conditioning? , ... See the refrigerant information label Manual Transmission under the hood. Five-Speed ...... , . 6.8 pints (3.2 L)* Automatic Transmission Six-Speed ...... 8.0 pints (3.8L)* Drain and Refill ...... 10 pints (4.7 L)* Rear Axle Lubricant ...... 3.5 pints (1.7L) Overhaul Not all air conditioning refrigerants are the same. VIN Engine Code K ...... 17.6 pints (8.3 L)* If the air conditioning system in your vehicle needs VIN Engine Code P ...... 2 1.6 pints (10.2 L)* refrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant isused. If you’re not sure, ask your Pontiac dealer, Cooling System VIN Engine Code K * Recheck fluid level after filling. See “Automatic Transmission Fluid” or “Manual Transmission Fluid” With Manual Transmission . . 12.5 quarts (11.8 L) in the Index. With Automatic Transmission 12.3 quarts (1 1.6 L) ** Recheck the oil level after filling. See “Engine Oil” VIN Engine Code P in the Index. With Manual Transmission . 15.3 quarts (14.5 L) With Automatic Transmission 15.1 quarts (14.3 L)

6-74 Vehicle Dimensions Replacement Parts Wheelbase 101.1 inches(257 cm) Air Cleaner Filter VIN EngineCode K ...... A1163C Front Tread 60.7 inches (154 cm) VIN Engine Code P ...... A1163C Rear Tread 60.7 inches (154 cm) VIN Engine CodeP (with WS6 Option)... A1097C Length Firebirdmormula 195.6 inches(497 cm) Battery ...... 75-60 Length Trans Am 197 inches (501 cm) Engine Oil Filter VIN Engine Code K ...... PF47 Width 74.5 inches (190 cm) VIN Engine Code P ...... PF25 Height 52.0 inches (132 cm) 6-76 Section 7 MaintenanceSchedule

This section covers the maintenance required for your Pontiac.Your vehicle needs these servicesto retain its safety, dependability and emission control performance.

7-2 Introduction 7-44 Part B: OwnerChecks and Services 7-2 Your Vehicle and the Environment 7-48 Part C: PeriodicMaintenance Inspections 7-3 How This Section is Organized 7-49 Caliper/KnuckleMaintenance Inspection 7-4 Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services 7-50 Part D: RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 7-4 Using Your Maintenance Schedule 7-52 Part E: MaintenanceRecord 7-4 Selecting the Right Schedule Ir * roduction IVPORTANT. I - . .LEP ENGINE ai ---rVehicle and the Environment AT THE PROPER LEVEL AND CHANGE AS Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your RECOMMENDED vehicle in good working condition, but also helpsthe environment. All recommended maintenance procedures are important.Improper vehicle maintenance caneven affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improperfluid I levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from yourvehicle. TO help protect our environment, and to keep your vekicl'e in good condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan supplements your newvehicle warranties. See your Warranty andOwner Assistancebooklet, or yaur Pontim dealer for details.

7-2 How This Section is Organized “Part B: Owner Checks and Services”tells you what should be checked and when. It also explains The remainder of this section is divided into five parts: what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in “Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services”shows good condition. what to have done and how often. Some of these “Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” services can be complex, so unless you are technically explains importantinspections that your Pondac dealer’s qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should service department or another qualified service center let your dealer’s service department or another qualified should perform. service center do these jobs. “Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”lists some products GM recommends to help keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products, or their equivalents, should be used whether you do the work yourself or have itdone. Performing maintenance work ona vehicle can be dangerous.In trying to do somejobs, you can “Part E: Maintenance Record”provides a place for be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance you to record the maintenanceperformed on your work only if you have the required know-how vehicle. Whenever any maintenance is performed, be sure towrite it down in this part. This will help you and the proper tools and equipment for the job. determine when your next maintenance should be done. If you have any doubt, havea qualified In addition, it is a good idea to keep your maintenance technician do the work. receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty repairs. If you are skilled enough to do some work on your vehicle, you will probably want to get the service information GM publishes. See “Serviceand Owner Publications” in the Index.

7-3 Part A: Scheduled Maintenance The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses Services these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary Using Your Maintenance Schedule repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle. These schedules are forvehicles that: We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know 0 carry passengers and cargo within recornmended exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive Tire-Loading Information label. See “Loading Your long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather. Vehicle” in the Index. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or 0 are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal you may drive it to work, to do errands or inmany driving limits. other ways. 0 use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index. Because of all the different ways people use their GM vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may even need Selecting the Right Schedule more frequent checks and replacements than you’ll find in the schedules in this section. So please read this First you’ll need to decide which of the two schedules is section and note how you drive. If you have any right for your vehicle. Here’s how to decidewhich questions on how to keepyour vehicle ingood schedule to follow: condition, see your Pontiac dealer. This part tells you the maintenance services you should have done and when you should schedule them. If you go to your dealer for your serviceneeds, you’ll know that GM-trained and supported.servicepeople will perform the work using genuine GM parts.

7-4 Maintenance Schedule

I Short TriplCity Definition I Short Trip/City Intervals Follow the Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule if any Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter one of these conditions is true foryour vehicle: Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first). Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Chassis Lubrication Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km). (or 6 months, whichever occurs first).Tire Rotation. This isparticularly important when outside Every 6,000 Miles(10 000 km) of Trailering: Rear temperatures are below freezing. Axle Fluid Change (Vehicles Towing Trailers). 0 Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent At the First 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Rear Axle Fluid driving in stop-and-go traffic). Change (Limited-SlipDifferential). Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter Most trips are through dusty areas. Inspection, if driving in dusty conditions. Automatic You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of Transmission Service (severe conditions only). your vehicle. Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter Replacement. Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines Inspection. If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi Every 60,000 Miles(100 000 km): Engine Accessory or other commercial application. Drive Belt Inspection. One of the reasons you should follow this schedule if Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement.Automatic is that these conditions cause engine oil to break Transmission Service (normalconditions). down soonex Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first). These intervals only summarize maintenance services. Be sure to follow the complete muintenance schedule on the following pages. 7-5I- Maintenance Schedule

n

Follow this maintenance schedule only if none of the Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter conditions from the Short Trip/City Maintenance Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first), Schedule is true. Do not use this schedule if the vehicle Chassis Lubrication (or every 12 months, whichever is used for trailer towing, driven in a dusty area or used occurs first). Tire Rotation, off paved roads. Use the Short Trip/City schedule for At the First 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Rear Axle Fluid these conditions. Change (Limited-Slip Differential), Driving a vehicle with n fully warmed engine under Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Automatic highway conditions causes engine oil to break Transmission Service (severe conditions only). down sluwm Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter Replacement. Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines Inspection. Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection. Every 109,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Automatic Transmission Service (normal conditions). Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first). These intervals only summarize maintenance services. Be sure to follow the cornnlete maintenance schedule on the following pages, 7-6 Short TriplCity Maintenance Schedule

The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles # Lubricate the steering and shift linkage. (166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles + A good time to check your brakes is during tire (166 000 km) at the same intervals.The services shown rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at Maintenance Inspection” in Part C of this schedule. the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km). ++ If you drive in a highly corrosive environment, your Footnotes front brake calipers may require additional inspection The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the and service, at every other tire rotation. See California Air Resources Board has determined that the “Caliper/Knuckle Maintenance Inspection” under failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify “Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of this schedule. the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and themaintenance be recorded. I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule 1 3,000 Miles (5 000 km) 6,000 Miles (10 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Sewice. An Ernissi’onControl Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +,) 0 Change the rear axle gear lubricant if vehicle is used to pull a trailer or has limited-sliD differential.

~ DATE ACTUALMILEAGE SERVICED BY: DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE -SERVICED BY Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule 9,000 Miles (15 000 km) 12,000 Miles (20 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Change the rear axle gear lubricant if vehicle is used to pull a trailer. 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.)

DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:

7-9 I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I I!T9000Miles (25 000.km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every - When doing frequent trailer towing. 3 months, whichever occurs first). - Uses such as found in taxi, poli'ce or An,Emission Control Service. delivery service. 0Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving lf you do not use your vehicle under any of in dusty conditions. Replace filter if these conditions, change the fluid and filter at necessary. An Emission Control Servic'e. (See ~00,000miles (166 000 km). footnote"f.) Manual transmission fluid doesn't 0Change 'automatictransmission fluid and require chanqe. filter if the vehicle is mainly driven I.-- ler one or more of these conditions: - In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 OF (32°C) or higher. - - - In hilly or mountainous terrain. -DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: i 1 Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule 1 18,000 Miles (30 000 km) 21,000 Miles (35 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Sewice. CI Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Indexfor proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) 0 Change the rear axle gear lubricant if vehicle is used to pull a trailer.

DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:

7-11 I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I 24,000 Miles (40 000 km) 27,000 Miles (45 000 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Sewice. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Change the rear axle gear lubricant if vehicle is used to pull a trailer. 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.)

- DATEACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:

I I 7-12 Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule 30,000 Miles (50 000 km) Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change automatic transmission fluid and 3 months, whichever occurs first). filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under An Emission Control Service. one or more of these conditions: 0Lubricate chassis components (or every - In heavy city traffic where the outside 6 months, whichever occurs first). temperature regularly reaches90" F (See footnote #.) (32°C) or higher. 0 Change the rearaxle gear lubricant if - In hilly or mountainous terrain. vehicle is used to pull atrailer. - When doing frequent trailer towing. Replace air cleaner filter. - Uses such as found in taxi, police or An Emission Control Service. delivery service. Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage If you do notuse your vehicle underany of or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any these conditions, change the fluid and-filterat damage. Replace parts as needed. 100,000 miles (166 000 km). An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.) Manual transmission fluid doesn't require change. (Continued) 1 Short TripKity Maintenance lSchedule I 30,000 MiZes (50 000 km) (Continued) 33,000 Miles (55 000 km) Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation 3 months, whichever occurs first). pattern and additional information, An Emission Control Service. (See footnote +.)

I DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY I DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:

7-14 I Short TriplCity Maintenance Schedule I 36,000 Miles (60 000 km) 39,000 Miles (45 000 km) Change engine oil and filter (or every 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) Change the rearaxle gear lubricant if vehicle is used to pull atrailer. Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in theIndex for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.)

DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:

7-15 Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule

~~~ 42,000 Miles (70 000 km) 45,000 Miles (75 000 km) CI Change engine oil and filter (or every 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 0Change automatic transmission fluid and 6 months, whichever occurs first). filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under (See footnote #.> one or more of these conditions: Q Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and - In heavy city traffic where the outside Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation temperature regularly reaches 90°F pattern and additional information. (32”C) or higher. (See footnote +.) - In hilly or mountainous terrain. Change the rear axle gear lubricant if - When doing frequent trailer towing. vehicle is used to pull a trailer. - Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. ACTUAL MILEAGE DATE SERVICED BY:~ ~~~ If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the$uid andfilter at 100,000 miles (166 000 km).

7-16 ~~ I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I 48,000 Miles (80 000 km) Manual transmission fluid doesn’t Change engine oil and filter (or every require change. 3 months, whichever occurs first). Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving An Emission Control Service. in dusty conditions. Replace filter if Lubricate chassis components (or every necessary. An Emission Control Service. 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote?.) (See footnote #.) Cl Change the rear axle gear lubricant if vehicle is used to pull a trailer. 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.)

DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:

. t 7-17 rShort Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I 51,000 Miles (85 000 km) 54,000 Miles (90 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter l(or every [7 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Sewice. An Emission Control Service. Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) 0Change the rear axle gear lubricant if vehicle is used to pull a trailer.

I I t-t-tlACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: I DATE I ACTUAL MILEAGE (SERVICED BY: I 7-18 Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule 57,000 Miles (95 000 km) 60,000 Miles (100 000 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Change the rear axle gear lubricant if vehicle is used to pull a trailer. 0Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: - In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 OF DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: (32 O C)or higher. - In hilly or mountainous terrain.

- When doing frequent trailer towing. (Continued)

7-19 I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I

60,000 Miles (I00 000 km) (Continued) - Uses such as found in taxi, police or 0Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage delivery service. or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket€or any If you do not use your vehicle underany of damage. Replace parts as needed. these conditions, change the fluid and filter at An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.) lO0,OOO miles (166 000 km). 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Manual transmission fluid doesn’t Rotation’’ in theIndex for properrotation require change. pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) (Also see hotnote ++.) 0Inspect engine accessory drive belt. 0Replace air cleaner filter. An Emission Control Service. I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I 63,000 Miles (105 000 km) 66,000 Miles (110 000 km) Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) I3 Change the rear axle gear lubricant if vehicle is used to pull a trailer.

I i t!ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I 69,000 Miles (115 000 km) 72,000 Milles (120 000 km) 0Change engine oil and €iilter (or every R Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Cuntrol Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) Change the rear axle gear lubricant if vehicle is used to pull a trailer. 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information, (See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.)

7-22 1 Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule 1 75,000 Miles (125 000 km)

Change engine oil and filter (or every If you do not use your vehicle under any of 3 months, whichever occurs first). these conditions, change the fluid and filter ut An Emission Control Service. 100,000 miles (166 000 km). 0Change automatic transmission fluid and Manual transmission fluid doesn’t filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under require change. one or more of these conditions: Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving - In heavy city traffic where the outside in dusty conditions. Replace filter if temperature regularly reaches 90 OF necessary. An Emission Control Service. (32°C) or higher. (See footnote?.)

- In hilly or mountainous terrain. - When doing frequent trailer towing.

- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:

7-23 E&ip/Ccy Maintenance Schedule 1 78,000 Miles (130 000 km) 81,000 Miles (135 000 km) El Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Sewice. An Emissim Control Sewice. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 6’months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) Cl Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.> 0Change the rear axle gear lubricant if vehicle is used to pull a trailer,

I DATE I ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED -BY:

7-24 I Short TriplCity Maintenance Schedule I 84,000 Miles (140 000 km) 87,000 Miles (145 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Change the rear axle gear lubricant if vehicle is used to pull a trailer. Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ in the Indexfor proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.) IACTUAL MILEAGE -1

17-25 Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule 90,000 Miles (150 000 km) Change engine oil and filter (or every - Uses such as found in taxi, police or 3 months, whichever occurs first). delivery service. An Emission Control Sewice. vyou do not use your vehicle under any oj 0Lubricate chassis components (or every these conditions, change the fluid and filter at 6 months, whichever occurs first). 100,000 miles (166 000 km). (See footnote #.) Manual transmission fluid doesn’t 0Change the rear axle gear lubricant if require change. vehicle is used to pull a trailer. Replace air cleaner filter. 0Change automatic transmission fluid and An Emission Contrul Service. filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines fur damage one or more of these conditions: or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any - In heavy city traffic where the outside damage. Replace parts as needed. temperature regularly reaches 90 F An Emission Control Service. (See fOOtnOte-f..) (32 C)or higher. - In hilly or mountainous terrain. - When doing frequent trailer towing.

7-26 I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I 93,000 Miles (155 000 km) Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Change engine oil and filter (or every Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation 3 months, whichever occurs first). pattern and additional information. An Emission Control Service, (See footnote +.)

DATE SERVICEDACTUAL MILEAGE BY: I DATE I ACTUAL MILEAGE ISERVICED BY: I I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I 96,000 Miles (160 000 km) Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and 3 months, whichever OCCUI-s first). Rotation9’in the Index for proper rotation An Emission Control Service. pattern and additional information, 0Lubricate chassis components (or every (See footnote +.> (Also see footnote. ++.) 6 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.> 0Change the rear axle gear lubricant if vehicle is used to pull a trailer.

7-28 Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule 99,000 Milles (165 000 km) 100,000 Miles (166 000 km) Change engine oil and filter (or every Inspect spark plug wires. 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Sewice. An Emission Control Service, 0Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service. 0Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: - In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 OF (32°C) or higher. - In hilly or mountainous terrain. - Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:

(Continued) 7-29 I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule 1 lO0,OOO Miles (166 000 km) (Continued) 150,000 Miles (240 000 km) If you do not use your vehicle under any of 0Drain, flush and refill cooling system these conditions, the fluid and filter do not (or every 60 months since last service, require changing. whichever OCCU~Sfirst). See “Engine 17 If you haven’t used your vehicle under Coolant’’ in the Index for what to use. severe service conditions listed previously Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, and, therefore, haven’t changed your pressure cap and neck. Pressure test automatic transmission fluid, change both cooling system and pressure cap. the fluid and filter. An Emission Control Service.

-DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BE ACTUAL MILEAGE

7-30 Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule

The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles ## Lubricate thesteering and shiftlinkage. (166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles (166 000 km) at the same intervals.The services shown + A good time to check your brakes is during tire at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at rotation. See “Brake SystemInspection” under “Periodic the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km). Maintenance Inspections” inPart C of this schedule. ++ If you drive ina highly corrosiveenvironment, your Footnotes front brake calipers may require additional inspection ? The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the and service, at every other tire rotation. See California Air Resources Board has determined that the “Caliper/Knuckle Maintenance Inspection” under failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify “Periodic Maintenance Inspections”in Part C of the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the this schedule. completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals andthe maintenance be recorded. Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule 7,500 Miles (12 500 km) 15,000 Miles (25 000 km) e3 Change engine ‘oiland filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. c] Lubricate chassis components (or every 0Lubricate chassis components (OF every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) (See footnote #.) El Change the rear axle gear lubricant if the 0Change automatic transmission fluid and vehicle has limited-slip differential. filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under 17 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and one or more of these conditions: Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation - In heavy city traffic where the outside pattern and additional informatiion. temperature regularly reaches 90°F (See footnote t-.) (32’ C) or higher. - In hilly or mountainous terrain. I DATE I ACTUAL MILEAGE (SERVICED BY: I - When doing frequent trailer towing.

7-32 I Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule I 22,500 Miles (37 500 km)

- Uses such as found in taxi, police or 0Change engine oil and filter (or every delivery service. 12 months, whichever occurs first). If you do not use your vehicle underany of An Emission Control Service. these conditions, change the fluid and filter at 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 100,000 miles (166 000 km). 12 months, whichever occurs first). Manual transmission fluid doesn’t (See footnote #.) require change. 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and 17 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) (See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.)

7-33 I Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule

30,000 Miles (50 000 km) - When doing frequent trailer towing. CI Change engine oil and filter l(or every - Uses such as found in taxi, police or 12 months, whichever occurs first). delivery service. An Emission Control Sewice. If you do not use your vehicle under any of 0Lubricate chassis components (or every these conditions, change the fluid and filter at 12 months, whichever occurs first). JO0,OOO miles (166 000 km). (See footnote #.) Manual transmission fluid doesn’t 0Change automatic transmission fluid and require change. filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and one or more of these conditions: Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation - In heavy city traffic where the outside pattern and additional information. temperature regularly reaches90 OF (See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.) (32°C)or higher. - In hilly or mountainous terrain.

7-34 I Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule I 37,500 Miles (62 500 km) 0 Replace air cleaner filter. Cl Change engine oil and filter (or every An Emission Control Service. 12 months, whichever occurs first). 0Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage An Emission Control Service. or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any Lubricate chassis components (or every damage. Replace parts as needed. 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. (See footnoteJf.) (See footnote #.) 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in theIndex for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY LUU~Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule 45,000 Miles (75 UCIU km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every - Uses such as found in taxi, police or 12 months, whchever occurs first). delivery service. An Emission Control Service. lf you do not use your vehicle underany of 0Lubricate chassis components (or every these conditions, change the fluid and@lter at 12 months, whichever occurs first). 100,000 miles (166 000 krn). (See,footnote #.) Manual transmission fluid doesn’t 0Change automatic transmission fluid md require change. filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and one or more of these conditions: Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation - In heavy city traffic where the outside pattern and additional information. temperature regularly reaches 90 OF (See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.) (32°C) or higher. - In hilly or mountainous terrain. - When doing frequent trailer towing. fiACTUALMILEAGE SERVICED BY:

7-36 Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule I 52,500 Miles (87 500 km) 60,000 Miles (100 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. Lubricate chassis components (or every 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 12 months, whichever occurs first).

(See footnote #.) (See footnote #.) (. 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and 0Change automatic transmission fluid and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under pattern and additional information. one or more of these conditions: (See footnote +.) - In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher. - In hilly or mountainous terrain, I DATE ACTUAL MILEAGESERVICED BY: - When doing frequent trailer towing. (Continued) Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule

60,000 Miles (100 000 knz) (Continued) - Uses such as found in taxi, police or 0Replace air cleaner filter. delivery service. An Emission Control Service. If you do not use your vehicle under any of 0Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage these conditions, change the fluid and filter at or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any l00,OOO miles (166 000 km). damage. Replace parts as needed. An Manual transmission fluid doesn’t Emission Control Service. (See footnote’f .) require change. U Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) Ill Inspect engine accessory drive belt.

I DATE I ACTUAL MILEAGE ISERVICED BY:I

7-38 Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule I 67,500 Miles (112 500 km) 75,000 Miles (125 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) (See footnote #.) 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Change automatic transmission fluid and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under pattern and additional information. one or more of these conditions: (See footnote +.) - In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches90 OF (32°C) or higher. - In hilly or mountainous terrain. 1 DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: - When doing frequent trailer towing. (Continued)

7-39 wgTripEIighway Maintenance Schedule I 75,000 Miles (125 000 km) (Continued) 82,500 Miles (137 500 km) - Uses such as found in taxi, police or Change engine oil and filter (or every delivery service. 12 months, whichever o’ccursfirst). If you do not use your vehicle under any of An Emission Control Sewice. these conditions, change the fluid and filter at 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 100,000 miles (166 000 km). 12 months, whichever occurs first). Manual transmission fluid doesn’t (See footnote #.) require change. 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) (See footnote +.) (Also see footnote ++.>

I DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:

7-40 Long TripEIighwav Maintenance Schedule 90,000 Miles (150 0001 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every - Uses such as found in taxi, police or 12 months, whichever occurs first). delivery service. An Emission Control Service. If you do notuse your vehicleunder any of 0Lubricate chassis components (or every these conditions, changethe fluid and filter at 12 months, whichever occurs first). IO0,OOO miles (166 000 km). (See footnote #.) Manual transmission fluid doesn’t 0Change automatic transmission fluid and require change. filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under 0 Replace air cleaner filter. one or more of these conditions: An Emission Control Service. - In heavy city traffic where the outside 0Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage temperature regularly reaches 90 OF or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any (32 O C) or higher. damage. Replace parts as needed. - In hilly or mountainous terrain. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.) - When doing frequent trailer towing. (Continued)

7-41 Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule I 90,000 Miles (150 000 km) (Continued) 97,500 Miles (162 500 km) 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation 12 months, whichever occurs first). pattern and additional information, An Emission Control Service. (See footnote +.>(Also see footnote ++.) 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) I Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule I 100,000 Miles (166 000 km) 150,000 Miles (240 000 km) Inspect spark plug wires. Drain, flush and refill cooling system An Emission Control Sewice. (or every 60 months since last service, 17 Replace spark plugs. whichever occurs first). See “Engine An Emission Control Service. Coolant” in the Index for what to use. If you haven’t used your vehicle under Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, severe service conditions listed previously pressure cap and neck. Pressure test and, therefore, haven’t changed your the cooling system and pressure cap. automatic transmission fluid, change both An Emission Control Service. the fluid and filter.

I DATE I ACTUAL MILEAGE (SERVICED BY:( Part B: Owner Checks and Services EngineCoolant Level Check Listedbelow are owner checks and services which Check the engineco’olant level and add DEX-COOL@ should be performed at the intervals specified to help coolant mix if necessary, See “Engine Coolant” in the ensure the safety, dependability andemission control Index for further details. performance of your vehicle. Windshield WasherFluid Level Check Be sure any necessary repairsare completed at once. Check the windshield washer fluid level in the Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your windshield washer tank and add the proper fluidif vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown in necessary. See “WindshieldWasher Fluid” in the Index D. Part for further details. At Each Fuel Fill At Least Once a Month If is importunt for you or a sewice statim attendant tu peqfiorm these underhood checks ut eachfielfill. Tire Inflation Check Make sure tires are inflated tothe correct pressures. See Engine Oil Level Check “Tires” in the Indexfor further details. Check the engine oil leveland add the proper oil if necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index €or Cassette Deck Service further details. Clean cassette deck.Cleaning should be done every 50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems”in the Index for further details.

7-44 At Least Twice a Year Automatic Transmission Check Check the transmission fluid level; addif needed. See Restraint System Check “Automatic Transmission” in the Index.A fluid loss Make sure thesafety belt reminder lightand all your may indicate a problem. Checkthe system and repair belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchoragesare if needed. working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts.If you see anythingthat might Hydraulic Clutch System Check keep a safety belt system from doing itsjob, have it Check the fluid level in the clutchreservoir. See repaired. Haveany torn or frayed safety belts replaced. “Hydraulic Clutch Fluid” in the Index.A fluid loss Also look for any opened orbroken air bag covers, and may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system if needed. does not need regular maintenance.) At Least Once a Year Wiper Blade Check Key Lock Cylinders Service Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade inserts that appearworn or damaged or that streak or Lubricate thekey lock cylinderswith the lubricant miss areasof the windshield. Also see“Wiper Blades, specified inPart D. Cleaning” in the Index. Body Lubrication Service Manual Transmission Check Lubricate allbody door hinges. Also lubricateall hinges Check the transmission fluid level; addif needed. See and latches, including thosefor the hood, headlampdoor “Manual Transmission” in the Index.A fluid loss may assemblies, rear compartment, console doors andany indicate a problem. Check the system and repair folding seat hardware. PartD tells you what to use. if needed. More frequent lubricationmay be required when exposed to a corrosive environment. Starter Switch Check Brake-Transmission Shift Interlock(BTSI) Check (Automatic Transmission)

When you are doing this check, the vehicle could move suddenly.If it does, you or others could be When you are doing this check, the vehiclecould injured. Follow the steps below. move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be injured. Follow the steps below. 1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle. 1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room 2, Firmly apply both the parking brake (see“Parking around the vehicle. It should be parked on a Brake” in the Index if necessary) and the regular brake. level surface. NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be 2. Firmly apply the parking brake (see “Parking Brake” ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts. in the Index if necessary). 3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake engine in each gear. The starter should work only in immediately if the vehiclebegins to move. PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works in 3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN any other position, your vehicle needs service. position, but don’t start the engine. Without applying On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of in NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch down halfway PARK (P) with normal effort.If the shift lever and try to start the engine. The starter should work moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle’s BTSI only when the clutch ispushed down all the way to needs service. the floor. If the starter works when the clutch isn’t pushed all the way down, your vehicle needs service. 7-46 Ignition Transmission Lock Check Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn parking brake. the ignition key to LOCK in eachshift lever position. e To check the parking brake’s holding ability: 0 With an automatic transmission, the key should turn With the engine running and transmission in to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK (P). NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from With a manual transmission, the key should turn to the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is LOCK only when the shift lever is in REVERSE (R). held by the parking brake only. On vehicles with a key release button, try to turn the key a To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability: to LOCK without pressing the button. The key should With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then turn to LOCK only when you press the key button. release all brakes. On all vehicles, the key should come out only in LOCK. Underbody Flushing Service Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission At least every spring, use plain water to flush any PARK (P) Mechanism Check corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect.

I When you are doing this check, your vehicle could begin to move. You or others could be injured and property could be damaged. Make sure thereis room in front of your vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move. Part C: Periodic Maintenance Radiator and Heater Hose Inspection Inspections Inspect the hosesand have them replalcedif they are cracked, swollenor deteriorated. Inspect allpipes, Listed below are inspections and services which shouldbe fittings and clamps; replaceas needed. performed at least twice a year (for instance,each spring and fall). You should let your GM dealer’s service Throttle Linkage Inspection department or other qualified service center do thesejobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are completedat once. Inspect the throttle linkage for interference or binding, and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed. Proper procedures to perform these servicesmay be Replace any cablesthat have high effort or excessive wear. found in a GM service manual. See “Service and Owner Do not lubricate accelerator andcruise conbd cables. Publications” in the Index. Wear Axle Service Steering and Suspension Inspection Check the gear lubricant level in the rear axle and add if Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering needed. See “Rear Axle” in the Index. A fluid loss may system for damaged, loose or missingparts, signs of indicate a problem. Checkthe axle and repair it if needed. wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering lines and hoses for properhook-up, binding, leaks, Brake System Inspection cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect the completesystem. Inspect brake lines and Exhaust System Inspection hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect thebody near for surface condition.Also inspect drumbrake linings the exhaust system. Lookfor broken, damaged, missing or for wear and cracks. Inspect otherbrake parts, including out-of-position parts as well as open seams, holes, loose drums, wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake,etc. The connections or other conditions which could causea heat parking brake is self-adjusting and nomanual build-up in the floor pan or could let exhaust fumes into adjustment is required. You may needto have your the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust”in the Index. brakes inspected more oftenif your driving habitsor conditions result in frequent braking. CaliperKnuckle Maintenance Inspection If you operate your vehicle in a highly corrosive environment, asindicated by the shaded areas on the map following this text, your vehicle may require additional brake service. Refer to the appropriate GM Service Bulletin for the proper frontcaliper inspection procedure. As necessary, front caliperpins and knuckle brakepad abutments shouldbe lubricated at every other tire rotation. Also, see yourGM dealer’s service department orqualified service center for additional information.

I W

7-49 Part D: Recommended Fluids and USAGE PLUJD/LUBRICANT Lubricants Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11@ Brake Fluid NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified belowby name, System (GM Part No. 12377967 ur part number or specification may be obtained from your equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid). GM dealer. Hydraulic Clutch Hydraulic Clutch Fluid(GM Part System No. 12345347 or equivalent USAGE FLUIDLUBRICANT DOT-3 brake fluid). Engine oil w- w- Power Steering GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Petroleum Institute CertifiedFor System Part No. 1052884 1 pint, Gasoline Engines “Starburst” - 1050017 - 1 quart, or equivalent). symbol of the properviscosity. To - determine the preferred viscosity Manual DEXRON@-IIIAutomatic for your vehicle’sengine, see Transmission Transmission Fluid. “Engine Oil”in the Index. __

~ Automatic DEXRON@-III Automatic Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean water Transmission Transmission Fluid. (preferably distilled) and useonly Key Lock Multi-Pur ose lubricant, GM Goodwrench* DEX-COOL@ Cylinders Superlube& (GM Part or Havoline’ DEX-COOL@ No. 12346241 or equivalent). coolant. See “Engine Coolant” in - the Index. Clutch Linkage Engine oil. Pivot Points Coolant GM Part No. 3634621 or Supplement equivalent with a complete flush Sealer and refill. USAGE FLUIDLUBRICANT USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT Floor Shift Lubriplate lubricant aerosol Windshield GM Optikleen@Washer Solvent Linkage (GM Part No. 12346293 or Washer Solvent (GM Part No. 1051515) equivalent) or lubricant meeting or equivalent. requirements of NLGI # 2 Hood Latch Lubriplate lubricantaerosol Category LBor GC-LB. Assembly, (GM Part No. 12346293 or Chassis Chassis lubricant (GM Part Pivots, Spring equivalent) orlubricant meeting Lubrication No. 1052497 or equivalent) or Anchor and requirements of NLGI ## 2, lubricant meeting requirementsof Release Pawl Category LB or GC-LB. NLGI # 2, Category LB or Hood and Door Multi-puose lubricant, GC-LB. Hinges Superlube% (GM Part Rear Axle Axle Lubricant(GM Part No. 12346241 or equivalent). (Standard No. 12345977) or SAE 80W-90 Differential) GL-5 Gear Lubricant. Weatherstrip Dielectric Silicone Grease(GM Conditioning Part No. 12345579 or equivalent). Rear Axle Axle Lubricant (GM Part (Limited-Slip No. 12345977) and 4 ounces See “Replacement Parts”in the Index for recommended Differential) (1 18 ml) of Limited-Slip replacement filtersand spark plugs. Differential Lubricant Additiv’e (GM Part No. 1052358 or equivalent) where required. See “Rear Axle” in the Index.

7-51 Part E: Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed,record the Services” or “Periodic Maintenance”can be added on date, odometer reading and who performedthe service the following record pages.Also, you should retain all in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval. maintenance receipts.Your owner informationportfolio Any additional informationfrom “Owner Checks and is a convenient placeto store them.

Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCEPERFORMED

7-52 Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED SERVICED

i 7-53 Maintenance Record

I I I I Section 8 Customer Assistance Information

Here you will find outhow to contact Pontiacif you need assistance. This sectionalso tells you how to obtain service publications and how to report any safety defects.

8-2 Pontiac Cares 8 - 10 Warranty Information 8-3 What Makesup Pontiac Cares? 8- 10 ReportingSafety Defects to the United 8-3 Customer Satisfaction Procedure States Government 8-5 Customer Assist'ance forText Telephone 8-11 ReportingSafety Defects to the (TTY) Users Canadian Government 8-6 Pontiac RoadsideAssistance Program 8- 11 ReportingSafety Defects to General Motors 8-8 Canadian Roadside Assistance 8-11 OrderingService and Owner Publications 8-8 Pontiac Courtesy Transportation in Canada 8-9 GM Participation in an Alternative Dispute ResolutionProgram

8-1 Pontiac Cares The PONTIAC CARES philosophy and elements are designed to make you realize that Pontiac recognizes you as a valuable customer, appreciates your purchase decision, and is dedicated to taking care of the most important person ... YOU! PONTIAC CARES is: A valuable feature that comes with every Pontiac, a feature that offers a multitude of benefits that cangive you safety, security, comfort and convenience.

With PONTIAC CARES, you are nevermore than a phone call away from having your concern taken care of.

8-2 What makes up Pontiac Cares? Customer Satisfaction Procedure A 3 year/36,000 mile (60 000 km) Bumper to Bumper Warranty CustomerAssistance RoadsideAssistance

0 Courtesy Transportation All of these elements combine to makeyour driving experience an enjoyable one,and are discussed in greater detail further in yourowner’s manual. Pontiacis focusing on the changing needsof our customers and is committed to giving you an exceptional levelof customer care throughout the ownership experience. Our goal is to create total customer enthusiasmin our product and our services, andmake you the most satisfied customer inthe world.

8-3 Pontiac dealers have the facilities, trained technicians For help outsideof the United States and Canada, call and up-to-date information to promptly addressany the following numbersas appropriate: cancerns you may have. However, ifa concern has not 0 In Mexico: (525) 625-3256 been resolved to your complete satisfaction,take the following steps: 0 In Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) or 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management.Normally, concerns can In the U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994 be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has 0 In the Dominican Republic: 1-800-75 1-4135 already been reviewed withthe sales, serviceor parts (English) or 1-800-75 1-4136 (Spanish) manager, contact the ownerof the dealershipor the General Manager. 0 In the Bahamas: 1-800-389-0009 STEP TWO -- If after contactinga member of e In Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua and the British dealership management,it appears your concern cannot Virgin Islands: 1-800-534-0122 be resolvedby the dealership without further help, e In all other Caribbean countries:(809) 763- 1315 contact the Pontiac Customer Assistance Centerby calling 1-800-PM-CARES. In Canada, contact In other overseas lo'cations, callGM International GM of Canada Customer Communication Centre in Product Center in Canada at: (905) 644-4112. Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

8-4 For prompt assistance, please have the following In Canada, write to: information available to give the Customer General Motors of Canada Limited Assistance Representative: Customer Communication Centre, 163-005 0 Your name, address, home and business 1908 Colonel Sam Drive telephone numbers Oshawa, Ontario LlH 8P7 0 Vehicle Identification Number (This is available Refer to your Warrantyand Owner Assistance Information from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at booklet for addresses of GM Overseas offices. the top left of the instrument panel and visible When contacting Pontiac, please remember that your through the windshield .) concern will likely be resolvedin the dealership, using the 0 Dealership name and location dealer’s facilities, equipment and personnel. That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concern. 0 Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage 0 Nature of concern L us’ )merAssistance for Text I We encourage you to call us so we can give your inquiry - !pT --e (TTY) Users prompt attention. However, if you wish to write Pontiac, ‘10 assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or address your inquiry to: speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs), Pontiac Pontiac has TTY equipment available at itsCustomer Customer Assistance Center Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with One Pontiac Plaza Pontiac by dialing: 1-800-833-PONT. (TTY users in Pontiac, MI 48340-2952 Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.) Pontiac Roadside Assistance Program Security While You Travel I -8OO-ROADSmE (I-800-762-3743) As the proud owner of a new Pontiac vehicle,you are automatically enrolled in the Pontiac Roadside Assistance program. This value-added serviceis intended to provideyou with peace of mind as you drive in the city or travel the open road. Pontiac's Roadside Assistance toll-free number is staffed by a team of technically trained advisors, who are available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. F= We take anxiety out 'of uncertain situationsby providing minor repair information overthe phone or making arrangements to tow your vehicle tothe nearest Pontiac dealer. We will provide the following services for For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please 3 years/36,000 miles(60 000 km), at no expense toyou: provide the following informationto give the advisor:

Fuel delivery 0 Location of vehicle Keys locked in vehicle Telephone number of your location Tow to nearest dealership for warranty service 0 Vehicle model, year and color Change a flat tire 0 Mileage of vehicle Jumpstarts 0 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 0 Courtesy Transportation -- See Pontiac Courtesy Transportation section for details * Vehicle license plate number We have quick, easy access to telephonenumbers of the Pontiac reserves the right to limit servicesor following additional services depending youron needs: reimbursement to an owner or driver whenPontiac’s in judgement the claims become excessivein frequency or Hotels type of occurrence. 0 Glass replacement While we hopethat you never have theoccasion to use Rental vehicle or taxis our service, it is added security while traveling for you Police, fire department or hospitals and your family. Remember, we’re only a phone call away. Pontiac Roadside Assistance -- 1-800-ROADSIDE In many instances, mechanical failures are covered or 1-800-762-3743. under Pontiac’s comprehensivewarranty. However, when other services are utilized,our advisors will explain any payment obligationsyou might incur.

8-7 Canadian Roadside Assistance Pontiac strives to giveyou a worry free ownership of your vehicle, andwe realize the inconvenienceof being Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive without a car. So Pontiac has come up with a way to Roadside Assistance program accessiblefrom anywhere eliminate any frustrations you might havewhen trying in Canada or the United States. Please referto the to get a ride to work,o'r wondering howyou will get separate brochure provided by the dealeror 'call home. Well, your worries are over. Pontiac provides 1-800-268-6800 for emergency services. no-cost transportation when you bring your Pontiac Courtesy Transportation 1997 Pontiacin for warranty service. It appli'es to any repair covered under the 3 year/36,000 mile(60 000 km) limited warranty, and to any 1997 Bontiac requiring repairas a result of product recall or special policy situations. For same day service, you are entitledto one-way shuttle service of up to 10 miles (16 km). If the vehicle requires multipleday repairs, you're entitledto either a Pontiac loaneror reimbursement fora rental car,up to $30/day, for up to five days. Some state insurance regulations makeit impractical to rent vehicles to people under 21 years of age. If you are under 21 and have difficulty rentinga vehicle, Pontiac will reimburse you,up to $30/day, for any documented transportation you receive. In Canada, please consultyour GM dealer for information on Courtesy Transportation.

8-8 GM Participation in an Alternative BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court program administered by the Better Business Bureau systemto Dispute Resolution Program settle automotive disputes. This program available is This program is available in all 50 states and the free of charge to customers who currentlyown or lease a District of Columbia. Canadian owners referto your GM vehicle. Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for If you are not satisfied after following theCustomer information on the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Satisfaction Procedure,YOU may contact the BBB using Plan (CAMVAP). General Motors reservesthe right to the toll-free telephone number, or writethem at the change eligibility limitations and/or to discontinue its following address: participation in this program. BBB AUTO LINE Both Pontiac and your Pontiac dealer are committedto Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc. making sure you are completely satisfiedwith your new 4200 Wilson Boulevard vehicle. Our experience has shown that,if a situation Suite 800 arises where you feelyour concern hasnot been Arlington, VA 22203- 1804 adequately addressed, the Customer Satisfaction Procedure described earlier in this section is Telephone: 1-800-'955-5100 very successful. To file a claim,you will be asked to provide your name There may be instances wherean impartial third party and address, yourVehicle Identification Number (VIN) can assistin arriving at a solutionto a disagreement and a statementof the nature of your complaint. regarding vehicle repairsor interpretation of the New Eligibility is limited by vehicle age and mileage, and Vehicle Limited Warranty. To assist in resolving these other factors. disagreements, Pontiac voluntarily participates in BBB AUTO LINE.

8-9 We prefer you utilize the Customer Satisfaction REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS Procedure beforeyou resort to AUTOLINE, but you may contact theBBB at any time. The BBB will attempt TO THE UNITED STATES to resolve the complaint serving as an intermediary. If GOVERNMENT this mediation is unsuccessful, an informal hearingwill be scheduled where eligible customersmay present their If you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could case to an impartial third-party arbitrator. cause a crash or lcould cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic The arbitrator will makea decision whichyou may Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to accept or reject.If you accept the decision, GMwill be notifying General Motors. bound by that decision.The entire dispute resolution procedure should ordinarily take about40 days from the If NHTSA receives similar complaints,it may open an time you file a claim until a decision is made. investigation, andif it finds thata safety defect existsin a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy Some state lawsmay require you to use this program campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved before filinga claim with a state-run arbitrationprogram in individual problems betweenyou, your dealer or or in thecourts. For further information, contact the General Motors. BBB at 1-800-955-5100 or the Pontiac Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-PM-CARES . To contact NHTSA,you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or366-0123 in Warranty Information the Washington, D.C. area) or write to: Your vehicle comeswith a separate warranty booklet NHTSA, US.Department of Transportation that contains detailed warranty information. Washington, D.C, 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safetyfrom the Hotline,

8-10 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In Canada, please callus at 1-800-263-3777 (English) TO THE CANADIAN or 1-800-263-7854 (French).Or, write: General Motors of Canada Limited GOVERNMENT Customer Communication Centre,163-005 If you live in Canada,and you believe that your vehicle 1908 Colonel Sam Drive has a safety defect, you should immediatelynotify Oshawa, OntarioL1H 8P7 Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.You may write to: Ordering Service and Owner Transport Canada Publications in Canada Box 8880 Service manuals,service bulletins, owner’s manuals and Ottawa, Ontario K1G 352 other service literatureare available forpurchase for all REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTIS current and past model General Motorsvehicles. TO GENERAL MOTORS The toll-free telephone number for ordering information in Canada is 1-800-668-5539. In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us. Please call us at 1-800-PM-CARES or write: Pontiac Division Customer Assistance Center One Pontiac Plaza Pontiac, MI 48340-2952 1997 PONTIAC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION

The following publications covering the operationand servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out the Sewice Publication Order Form in this bookand mailing it in with your check, money order, or credit card information to Helm, /ncorporated (address below.)

CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 1997 PONTIAC SERVICE MANUALS OWNER’S INFORMATION Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information Owner publications are writtendirectly for Owners and on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes, intended to provide basic operational information about the electrical, steering, body, etc. vehicle. The owner’s manual willinclude the Maintenance RETAIL SELL PRICE: $90.00 Schedule for all models, TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and UNIT REPAIR MANUAL Warranty Booklet. This manual providesinformation on unit repair service RETAIL SELL PRICE: $15.00 procedures, adjustmentsand specifications for €he Without Portfolio: Owner’sManual only. 1997 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfe:rcases. RETAIL SELL PRICE: $1 0.00 RETAIL SELL PRICE: $40.00 CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS SERVICE BULLETINS Sewice Publications are available for currentand past Service Bulletins givetechnical service information needed rno’del GM vehicles. To request an order form, please to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks. specify year and model name of the vehicle. Each bulletin containsinstructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle. ORDER TOLL FREE Orders will be mailedwithin 10 days of receipt. Please allow ade uate time forpostal (NOTE: For Credit Card Holders Only) service. If further information is needed, write to the address s7l own below or call 1-800-782-4356 1-800-782-4356. Material cannot bereturned for credit without packing slip with return (Monday-Friday 8:OO AM - 6:OO PM EST) information within 30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be applied FAX Orders Only 1-313-865-5927 against the orlglnal order. & NOTES

8-14 Section 9 Index

Accessory Plug ...... 2-61 Appearance Care Materials ...... 6-67 AirBag ...... 1-21 Arbitration Program ...... 8-9 How Does it Restrain ...... 1-25 Ashtrays ...... 2-59 How it Works ...... 1-23 Audio Controls. Steering Wheel Touch Control ...... 3-21 Location ...... 1-23 Audio Equipment. Adding ...... 3-22 Readiness Light ...... 1.22.2.78 Audio Systems ...... 3-6 Servicing ...... 1- 26 Automatic Overdrive ...... 2-30 What Makes it Inflate ...... 1-24 Automatic Transmission What Will You See After it Inflates ...... 1-25 Check ...... 7-45 When Should it Inflate ...... 1-24 Fluid ...... 6-22 Aircleaner ...... 6-18 Operation ...... 2-28 Air Conditioning ...... 3-3 Park Mechanism Check ...... 7-47 Air Conditioning Refrigerants ...... 6-74 Shifting ...... 2-28 Air Control. Climate Control System ...... 3-2 Starting Your Engine ...... 2-25 Alarm. Content Theft-Deterrent ...... 2- 13 Axle. Limited-Slip Rear ...... 2-36 Alarm/PanicMode ...... 2-7 Axle. Rear ...... 6-29 Alignment and Balance. Tire ...... 6-55 Aluminum Wheels. Cleaning ...... 6-64 Antenna. Power ...... 3-24 Battery ...... 6-40 Antifreeze ...... 6-29 Jump Starting ...... 5-3 Anti-Lock Replacement. Remote Keyless Entry ...... 2-9 Brake System Warning Light ...... 2-80. 4-7 Warnings ...... 5-3. 5-5 Brakes ...... 4-7 BBB Auto Line ...... 8-9 Anti-Theft. Radio ...... 3- 19 Better Business Bureau Mediation ...... 8-9 Appearance Care ...... 6-58 Blizzard ...... 4-28 Brake Chains. Safety ...... 4-35 Adjustment ...... 6-39 Chains. Tire ...... 6-57 Fluid ...... 6-36 Changing a Flat Tire ...... 5-26 Master Cylinder ...... 6-36 Check Gauges Light ...... 2-89 Parking ...... 2-37 Checking Your Restraint Systems ...... 1-41 PedalTravel ...... 6-39 Chemical Paint Spotting ...... 6-66 Replacing System Parts ...... 6-40 Child Restraints' ...... 1-32 System Warning Light ...... 2-79 Securing in a Rear Seat Position ...... 1-34 Trailer ...... 4-35 Securing in the Right Front Seat Position ...... 1-36 Transmission Shift Interlock ...... 2-40 TopStrap ...... l-33 Wear ...... 6-38 WheretoPut ...... 1-32 Brakes, Anti-Lock ...... 4-7 Cigarette Lighter ...... 2-59 Braking ...... 4-6 Circuit Breakers and Fuses ...... 6-69 Braking in Emergencies...... 4- 10 Cleaner. Air ...... 6-18 Break-In, New Vehicle ...... 2-23 Cleaning Brightness Control ...... 2-54 Aluminum Wheels ...... 4-64 BTSI ...... 2-40 Convertible Top ...... 6-64 BTSICheck ...... 7-46 Fabric ...... 6-59 Bulb Replacement ...... 6-4 1 Glass ...... 6-61 Inside of Your Pontiac ...... 6-58 Instrument Panel ...... 6-61 CalipedKnuckle Maintenance Inspections ...... 7-49 Leather ...... 6-60 Canadian Roadside Assistance ...... 8-8 Outside of Your Pontiac ...... 6-63 Capacities and Specifications ...... 6-73 Removable Roof Panel ...... 6-62 Carbon Monoxide ...... 2- 10.2-41.2-42.4-29. 4-35 Special Problems ...... 6'-59 Cassette Deck Service ...... 7-44 Stains ...... 6-59 Cassette Tape Player ...... 3-7. 3-10 Tires ...... 6-65 Care ...... 3-23 Vinyl ...... 6-60 Errors ...... 3-8. 3-12 Wheels ...... 6-64 CD Player Theft-Deterrent Feature ...... 3 - 19 Windshield and Wiper Blades ...... 6-62 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp Bulb Replacement .... 6-44 Climate Control System ...... 3-2 Certification Label ...... 4-30 Clock. Setting the ...... 3-6

9-2 Close-Out Panel ...... 2-58 Defensive Driving ...... 4-2 Clutch. Hydraulic ...... 6-28 Defogger. Rear Window ...... 3-5 Comfort Controls ...... 3-2 Defogging ...... 3-4 Compact Disc Defrosting ...... 3-4 Care ...... 3-23 Delayed Illumination ...... 2- 18, 2-54 Player ...... 3-14 Dimensions, Vehicle ...... 6-75 Player Errors ...... 3 - 15 Dolby' B Noise Reduction ...... 3-9 Trunk Mounted Player ...... 3-16 Door Compact Spare Tire ...... 5-38 Last Door Closed Locking Feature ...... 2-5, 2-19 Content Theft-Deterrent ...... 2- 13 Lockout Prevention ...... 2-5, 2-19 AlarmRanicMode ...... 2-7 Locks ...... 2-4 Feature Customization ...... 2- 17 Downshifting ...... 2-36 Control of a Vehicle ...... 4-5 Driver Position ...... 1-13 Convertible Top ...... 2-68 Driver's Door Alarm Delay/Shock Sensor Enable ..... 2-22 Convex Outside Mirror ...... 2-57 Driving Coolant ...... 6-29 City ...... 4-20 Bleed Valves ...... 5-20, 5-24 Defensive ...... 4-2 Heater, Engine ...... 2-27 Drunken ...... 4-2 Recovery Tank ...... 5-17 Freeway ...... 4-21 Cooling System ...... 5- 16 InaBlizzard ...... 4-28 Courtesy Lamps ...... 2-54 In Foreign Countries ...... 6-5 Courtesy Transportation ...... 8-8 IntheRain ...... 4-17 Cruise Control ...... 2-47 Night ...... 4-15 Customer Assistance for Text TelephoneUsers ...... 8-5 On Curves ...... 4-10 Customer Assistance Information ...... 8- 1 On Grades While Towing a Trailer ...... 4-37 Customer Satisfaction Procedure ...... 8-3 On Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 4-23 On Snow and Ice ...... 4-26 Throughwater ...... 4-19 Damage, Finish ...... 6-65 WetRoads ...... 4-17 Damage, Sheet Metal ...... 6-65 Winter ...... 4-25 Daytime Running Lamps ...... 2-53 With a Trailer ...... 4-36 Dead Battery ...... 5-3 Drunken Driving ...... 4-2 Defects, Reporting Safety ...... 8- 10 9-3 Electrical Equipment. Adding ...... 2.26.3.22. 6.68 Feature Customization ...... 2- 17 Electrical System ...... 6-68 Delayed 11.lumination ...... 2-18 Engine ...... 6-10. 6-11 Driver's Door Alarm Delay/Shock Sensor Enable ... 2-22 Coolant ...... 6-29 Exit Lighting ...... 2-18 Coolant Heater ...... 2-27 Last Door Closed Locking ...... 2-19 Coolant Level Check ...... 7-44 Lockout Prevention ...... 2-19 Coolant Temperature Gage ...... 2-83 Remote Keyless Entry Control Verification ...... 2-19 Exhaust ...... 2-41 Theft-Deterrent Arming Method ...... 2-20 FuseBlocks ...... 6-70 Theft-Deterrent Arming Verification ...... 2-21 Identification ...... 6-68 Fifth Gear. Manual Transmission ...... 2-32. 2-34 OilLevelCheck ...... 7-44 Filling Your Tank ...... 6-6 Overheating ...... 5-14 Filter. Air ...... 6-20 RunningWhileParked ...... 2-42 Filter. Engine Oil ...... 6-17 Specifications ...... 6-73 Finishcare ...... 6-63 StartingYour ...... 2-25 Finish Damage ...... 6-65 Engineoil ...... 6-12 First Gear. Automatic Transmission ...... 2-31 Adding ...... 6-14 First Gear. Manual Transmission ...... 2-32. 2-33 Additives ...... 6-1'7 Flashers. Hazar'd Warning ...... 5-2 Checking ...... 6-13 Flat Tire. Changing ...... 5-26 Pressure Gage ...... 2-87 FloorMats ...... 2-61 Used ...... 6-18 Fluids and Lubricants ...... 7-50 Whentochange ...... 6-17 FogLamps ...... 2-53 Ethanol ...... 6-5 Folding Rear Seatback ...... 1-7 Exhaust. Engine ...... 2-4 1 Foreign Countries. Fuel ...... 6-5 Exit Lighting ...... 2-18. 2-54 Fourth Gear. Manual Transmission ...... 2-32. 2-34 Exit Lightingmelayed Illumination ...... 2- 18 Four-Way Manual Seat ...... 1-3 .. Express-Down Window ...... 2-43 French Language Manual ...... 11 Frontconsole ...... 2-58 FrontTowing ...... 5-10 Fabric Cleaning ...... 6-59 Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement ...... 6-43 Fan Control. Climate Control System ...... 3-2 Fuel ...... 6-3 Headlamps ...... 2-5 1 Filling Your Tank ...... 6-6 HighLow Beam Changer ...... 2-45 Gage ...... 2-89 On Reminder ...... 2-51 In Foreign Countries ...... 6-5 Wiring ...... 6-69 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...... 6-69 Hearing Impaired. Customer Assistance ...... 8-5 Heating ...... 3-4 High-Beam Headlamps ...... 2-45 Gages Highway Hypnosis ...... 4-23 Engine (khntTemperature ...... 2-83 Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 4-23 Engine oil Pra~re...... 2-87Hitches. Trailer ...... 4-35 Fuel ...... 2-89 Hood GAWR ...... 4-30 Checking Things Under ...... 6-8 Gear Positions. Automatic Transmission ...... 2-28 Release ...... 6-9 G ear Positions. Gear Manual Transmission ..... Horn2-32.2-33. 2-34 ...... 2-43 Glove Box ...... 2-58 Hydraulic Clutch ...... 6-28 Graphic Equalizer ...... 3-10? 3-14 Hydraulic Clutch System Check ...... 7-45 Gross Axle WeightRating ...... 4-30 Hydroplaning ...... 4-19 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ...... 4-30.. G uide en Frangais en Guide ...... ' * all GVWR ...... 4-30 Ignition Switch ...... 2-23 Inflation. Tire ...... 6-50 Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror ...... 2-56 Halogen Bulbs ...... 6-41 Inspections ...... 7-48 Hatch ...... 2-10 Brakesystem ...... 7-48 Hatch Release ...... 2- 11 Caliper/Knuckle ...... 7-49 HatchRelease. Remote ...... 2- 11 Exhaust Systems ...... 7-48 HazardWarning Flashers ...... 5-2 Radiatorand Heater Hose ...... 7-48 Head Restraints ...... 1-6 RearAxle ...... 7-48 Headlamp Bulb Replacement ...... 6-4 1 Steering ...... 7-48 Headlamp Doors ...... 2-52 Suspension ...... 7-48 Throttle Linkage ...... 7-48

9-5 Instrument Panel ...... 2-74 Lights Brightness Control ...... 2-54 Air Bag Readiness ...... 1-22. 2.78 Cleaning ...... 6-61 Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ...... 2.80. 4.7 Cluster ...... 2-76 Brake System Warning ...... 2-79 Interior Lamps ...... 2-54 CheckGauges ...... 2-89 Low Coolant ...... 2-83 LowOil ...... 2-88 Jack. Tire ...... 5-29 Low Traction ...... 2-82. 4-9 JumpStarting ...... 5-3 Safety Belt Reminder ...... 1-8. 2-78 Service Engine Soon ...... 2-84 Traction Control System Warning ...... 2-8 1. 4-9 Key Lock Cylinders Service ...... 7-45 Limited-Slip Differential. Rear Axle ...... 6-29 Key Rele'ase Button ...... 2-'24 Loading YourVehicle ...... 4-30 Keys ...... 2-2 Lockout Prevention ...... 2-5, 2-19 Locks ...... 2-4 Labels CyIinders ...... 7-45 Certification ...... 4-30 Door ...... 2-4 Service Parts Identification ...... 6-68 Key Lock Cylinder Service ...... 7-45 Tire-Loading Information ...... 4-30 Power Door ...... 2-5 Vehicle Identification Number ...... 6-68 Steering Column Lock Check ...... 7-47 Low Coolant Light ...... 2-83 Lamps ...... 2-51 Low Oil Light ...... 2-88 Courtesy 2-54 ...... Low Traction Light ...... 2-82. 4-9 Interior ...... 2-54 Lubricants and Fluids 7-50 OnReminder ...... 2-51 ...... Last Door Closed Locking Feature ...... 2-52- 19 Lubrication Service. Body ...... 7-45 Last Door Closed LockingLockout Prevention ...... 2- 19 Lumbar Controls ...... 1-4 Latches, Front Seatback ...... 1-6 Leaving Your Vehicle ...... 2-5 MainFuse Block ...... 6-70 Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running ...... 2-39 Maintenance. Normal Replacem'ent Parts ...... 6-75 Lighter ...... 2-59 Maintenance Record ...... 7-52

94 ...... Maintenance Schedule ...... 7- 1 Neutral. Automatic Transmission ...... 2-29 Long TripMighway Definition ...... 7-6 Neutral. Manual Transmission ...... 2.32.2.34 Long Trip/Highway Intervals ...... 7-6 New Vehicle “Break-In” ...... 2-23 Owner Checks and Services ...... 7-44 Night Vision ...... 4-16 Periodic Maintenance Inspections ...... 7-48 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...... 7-50 Scheduled Maintenance Services ...... 7-4 Odometer ...... 2-77 Short Trip/City Definition ...... 7-5 Odometer. Trip ...... 2-77 Short Trip/City Intervals ...... 7-5 Off-Road Recovery ...... 4-12 Maintenance. Underbody ...... 6-66 Oil. Engine ...... 6-12 Maintenance When Trailer Towing ...... 4-38 Overdrive, Automatic Transmission ...... 2-30 Malfunction Indicator Lamp ...... 2-84 Overheating Engine ...... 5-14 Manual Front Seat ...... 1-2 Owner Checks and Services ...... 7-44 Manual Mirror ...... 2-56 Owner Publications, Ordering ...... 8-12 Manual Transmission Check ...... 7-45 Fluid ...... 6-27 Paint Spotting. Chemical ...... 6-66 Shifting ...... 2-32 Park Starting Your Engine ...... 2-26 Automatic Transmission ...... 2-28 MapPocket ...... 2-58 Shifting Into ...... 2-38 Methanol ...... 6-5 Shifting Out of ...... 2-40 Mirrors ...... 2-56 Parking Convex Outside ...... 2-57 AtNight ...... 2-12 Inside Day/Night Rearview ...... 2-56 Brake ...... 2-37 Manual ...... 2-56 Brake Mechanism Check ...... 7-47 Manual Remote Control ...... 2-56 Lots ...... 2-12 Power Remote Control ...... 2-57 Over Things That Burn ...... 2-41 Visor Vanity ...... 2-60 With a Trailer ...... 4-38 MountainRoads ...... 4-23 Parking Your Vehicle, Manual Transmission ...... 2-40 Multifunction Lever ...... 2-44 Passenger Position ...... 1-21, 1-27

9-7 Passing ...... 4-13 Towing ...... 5-12 PASS-Key' -49' I1 * ...... 2-16 Window Defogger ...... 3-5 Periodic Maintenance Inspections ...... 7-48 Rearview Mirror, Inside Daymight ...... 2-56 Pontiac Cares Information ...... 8-2 Reclining Front Seatbacks ...... 1-4 Power Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...... 7-50 Antenna Mast Care ...... 3-24 Recovery Tank, Coolant ...... 5-17 DoorLocks ...... 2-5 Refrigerants, Air Conditioning ...... 6-74 Option Fuses ...... 6-69 Remote Remote Control Mirror ...... 2-57 Hatch Release ...... 2-11 Retain'ed Accessory ...... 2-55 Keyless Entry ...... 2-6 Seat ...... ,...... ,...... l-3 Keyless Lock Control Verification ...... 2-19 Steering ...... 4-10 Replacement Steering Fluid ...... 6-33 Bulbs ...... 6-73 Windows ...... 2-43 Parts ...... 6-75 Pregnancy. Use of Safety Belts ...... 1-20 Wheel ...... 6-56 Problems on the Road ...... 5-1 Replacing Safety Belts ...... 1-41 Publications, Service and Owner ...... 8- 12 Reporting Sa€ety Defects ...... 8-10 Restraints Checking ...... 1-41 Radiator ...... 5.19. 5.22 Child ...... ,....,...... ,+...... l-32 Radiator Pressure Cap ...... 6-33 Head ...... 1-6 Radio Reception ...... 3-22 Replacing Pats After a Crash ...... 1-41 Radios ...... 3-7.3-10. 3-14 SystemCheck ...... 7-44 Rain. Driving In ...... 4-17 Retained Accessory Power ...... 2-55 UP ...... 2-55 Reverse, Automatic Transmission ...... 2-29 ReadingLamps ...... 2-55 Reverse, Manual Transmission ...... 2-33. 2-34 Rear Right Front Passenger Position ...... 1-21 Axle ...... 6-29 Roadside Assistance ...... 8-6 Lamp Bulb Replacement ...... 6-45 Roadside Assistance, Canadian ...... 8-8 Seatpassengers ..,...... ,,,...... ,... l-27 Rocking Your Vehicle ...... 5-40 Sidemarker Bulb Replacement ...... 6-46 Roof Panels, Twin Lift-off ...... 2-61 Storage ...... 2-58 Rotation, Tires ...... 6-51 . 9-8 . Safety Belt Extender ...... , ...... 1-41 Power ...... 1-3 SafetyBelts ...... 1-7 Restraint Systems ...... 1-1 Adults ...... 1-13 Seat Controls ...... 1-2 Care ...... 6-61 Securing a Child Restraint ...... 1-34 Children ...... 1-30 Second Gear. Automatic Transmission ...... 2-30 Driver Position ...... 1. 13 Second Gear. Manual Transmission ...... 2-32. 2-34 Extender ...... 1-41 Second-Gear Start ...... 2-31 How to Wear Properly ...... 1. 13 Service ...... 6-2 Incorrect Usage ...... 1.16.1.39. 1-40 Bulletins. Ordering ...... 8-12 Lap-Shoulder ...... 1. 13. 1-27 Engine Soon Light ...... 2-84 Larger Children ...... 1-38 Manuals. Ordering ...... 8-12 Questions and Answers ...... 1. 12 Parts Identification Label ...... 6-68 Rear Seat Positions ...... 1-27 Publications. Ordering ...... 8-12 Reminder Light ...... 1.8. 2.78 Work. Doing Your Own ...... 6-2 Replacing After a Crash ...... 1-41 Service and Appearance Care ...... 6-1 Right Front Passenger Position ...... 1-21 Service and Owner Publications ...... 8-12 Smaller Children and Babies ...... 1-30 Service Publications ...... 8-12 Use During Pregnancy ...... 1-20 Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Pontiac ...... 1-26 Why They Work ...... 1-9 Sheet Metal Damage ...... 6-65 Safety Chains ...... 4-35 ShiftLever ...... 2-28 Safety Defects. Reporting ...... 8-10... Shiftspeeds ...... 2-36 Safety Warnings and Symbols ...... 111 Shifting Scheduled Maintenance Services ...... 7-4 AutomaticTransmission ...... 2-28 Seatback Into Park (P) ...... 2-38 Folding Rear ...... 1-7 Outofpark ...... 2-40 Front Latches ...... 1-6 Shifting. Manual Transmission ...... 2-32. 2-33 Reclining Front ...... 1-4 Signaling Turns ...... 2-45 Seats Sixth Gear. Manual Transmission ...... 2-34 Four-Way Manual ...... 1-3 Skidding ...... 4-14 Fully Articulating Sport ...... , 1-4 Skip Shift Light ...... 2-35 Lumbar Control ...... 1-4 Sound Equipment. Adding ...... 3-22 Manual Front ...... 1-2 Spare Tire. Compact ...... 5-38 Specmcauons ana Capacities ...... 6-73 Theft ...... 2-12 Specifications. Engine ...... 6-93 Theft-Deterrent Speech hpaired. Customer Assistance ...... 8-5 ArmingMethod ...... 2-20 S~~dometer...... 2-77 Arming Verification ...... 2-21 Sportscat ...... 1-4 DisarEning ...... 2-15 SRS ...... 1-21 Feature, CD Player ...... 3-19 Stains, Cleaning ...... 6-59 THEFTLOCK”” ...... 3-19 Standard Differential. Rear Axle ...... 6-29 Thermostat ...... 6-33 Starter Switch Check ...... 7-46 Third Gear, Automatic Transmission ...... 2-30 Starting Your Engine ...... 2-25 Third Gear, Manual Transmission ...... 2-32, 2-34 Steam ...... 5-14 Tilt Steering Wheel ...... 2-44 Steering ...... 4-10 Time, Setting the ...... 3-6 Column Lock Check ...... 7-47 Tire , Storing Tire and Tools ...... 5-36 In Emergencies ...... 4- 11 Tire Chains ...... 6-57 Power ...... 4-10 Tire Loading ...... 4-30 Tips ...... 4- 10 Tire-Loading Information Label ...... 4-30 Wheel. Tilt ...... 2-44 Tires ...... 6-49 Wheel Touch Controls ...... 3-21 Alignment and Balance ...... 6-55 Storage Areas ...... 2-58 Buying New ...... 6-53 Storage. Vehicle ...... 6-40 Chains ...... 6-57 Stuck: In Sand. Mud, Ice or Snow ...... 5-39 Changing a Flat ...... 5-26 Sunvisors ...... 2-60 Cleaning ...... 6-65 Sunshades. T-Top ...... 2-66 Compact Spare ...... 5-38 Supplemental Restraint System ...... 1-21 Inflation ...... 6-50 Symbols. Vehicle ...... v Inflation Check ...... 7-44 Synchronization ...... 2-8 Inspection and Rotation ...... 6-51 Loading ...... 4-30 Pressure ...... 6-50 Tachometer ...... 2-77 Temperature ...... 6-55 TapePlayerCare ...... 3-23 Traction ...... 6-55 Temperature Control. Climate Control System ...... 3-2

9-10 Treadwear ...... 6-54 Transmitters. Matching ...... 2-8 Uniform Quality Grading ...... 6-54 Transmitters. Range ...... 2-7 Wear Indicators ...... 6-53 Transmitters. Remote Keyless Entry ...... 2-6 Wheel Replacement ...... 6-56 Transmitters. Synchronization ...... 2-8 When It’s Time for New ...... 6-53 Transportation.Courtesy ...... 8-8 TopStrap ...... 1-33 Trip Odometer ...... 2-77 Torque Lock ...... 2-40 T-Top Sunshades ...... 2-66 Torque. Wheel Nut ...... 5-36. 6-73 TTY Users ...... 8-5 TowingaTrajler ...... 4-32 Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals ...... 2-45 Towing Your Vehicle ...... 5-8 Turn SignalNultifunction Lever ...... 2-44 Traction Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer ...... 4-37 Control Off Button ...... 4-10 Twin Lift-off Roof Panels ...... 2-61 Control System ...... 4-8 Control System Warning Light ...... 2-81. 4-9 Trailer Underbody Flushing Service ...... 7-47 Brakes ...... 4-35 Underbody Maintenance ...... 6-66 Driving on Grades ...... 4-37 Underhood Electrical Center ...... 6-72 Drivingwith ...... 4-36 Hitches ...... 4-35 Maintenance When Towing ...... 4-38 Vehicle ParkingonHills ...... 4-38 Control ...... 4-5 Safety Chains ...... 4-35 DamageWarnings ...... iv Tongueweight ...... 4-34 Dimensions ...... 6-75 TotalWeight on Tires ...... 4-35 Identification Number ...... 6-68 Towing ...... 4-32 Loading ...... 4-30 Turnsignals ...... 4-37 Storage ...... 6-40 Weight ...... 4-33 Ventilation System ...... 3-5 Transmission Fluid Visor Vanity Mirrors ...... 2-60 Automatic ...... 6-22 Visors, Sun ...... 2-60 ...... 6-27 Voltmeter ...... 2-79 Warning Devices ...... 5-3 WindshieldWasher ...... 2-47 Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators2-47 ...... 2-77 Fluid ...... 6-35 Warranty Information ...... 8-10 Fluid Level Check ...... 7-44 Washer Huid. Windshield ...... 2-47,6 '-35 WindshieldWiper ...... 2-46 Washing Your Vehicle ...... 6-63 Windshield Wiper. Cleaning ...... 2-46 Weatherstrips ...... 6-62 Blade Replacement ...... 6-47 Wheel Fuses ...... 6-69 Alignment ...... Driving...... 68-55 Winter ...... 4-25 Nut Torque ...... 5-36. 4-73 Wiring. Headlamp ...... 6-69 Replacement ...... 6-56 WreckerTowing ...... 5-8 Wrench ...... 5-29 Wrench.Whee1 ...... 5-29 Windows ...... 2-43 Express-Down ...... 2-43 Power ...... 2-43

9-12 .

WPACITIES, ,, AND SPECIFICATIONS (CbNTINUfL

-" ,,

I ransmlssron 5 Speed Man17.7.r 6 Speed Manual bength Automatic Firebiramm Trans Am

Headlamps Conlposite

,.. I -

-b.

Wearing a safety belt correctly is one of the most important thingsyou ar your passengers can do. This section contains very important informatior at It safetv be sage, air baas and child restraints.

One of the first thingsyou'll probably want todo when y0u get in vehicle is adjust theseats. Depending on your v to do this n llv or with Dower controls

To set the clock, press and hold HR until the ars. Press

Fheft-Deterrent Syste PASS-K@ II 4ccessory Plug in Lift-off Roof Panels (T-Tol :onvertible Top ction Control bystem (TCS jteerinq Wheel €a rols